TW202234886A - Adaptive loop filter with fixed filters - Google Patents

Adaptive loop filter with fixed filters Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW202234886A
TW202234886A TW110148425A TW110148425A TW202234886A TW 202234886 A TW202234886 A TW 202234886A TW 110148425 A TW110148425 A TW 110148425A TW 110148425 A TW110148425 A TW 110148425A TW 202234886 A TW202234886 A TW 202234886A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
sample
filter
reconstructed
value
video
Prior art date
Application number
TW110148425A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
瑪塔 卡克基維克茲
楠 胡
瓦迪姆 賽萊金
Original Assignee
美商高通公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US17/557,706 external-priority patent/US11778177B2/en
Application filed by 美商高通公司 filed Critical 美商高通公司
Publication of TW202234886A publication Critical patent/TW202234886A/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/102Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/117Filters, e.g. for pre-processing or post-processing
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/102Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/132Sampling, masking or truncation of coding units, e.g. adaptive resampling, frame skipping, frame interpolation or high-frequency transform coefficient masking
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/134Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or criterion affecting or controlling the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/136Incoming video signal characteristics or properties
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/169Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/17Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object
    • H04N19/176Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object the region being a block, e.g. a macroblock
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/70Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals characterised by syntax aspects related to video coding, e.g. related to compression standards
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/80Details of filtering operations specially adapted for video compression, e.g. for pixel interpolation
    • H04N19/82Details of filtering operations specially adapted for video compression, e.g. for pixel interpolation involving filtering within a prediction loop

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)

Abstract

A video decoder can be configured to apply a first stage adaptive loop filter (ALF) to a reconstructed sample by determining a first class index for the reconstructed sample, selecting a filter from a first set of filters based on the first class index, and applying the filter from the first set of filters to the reconstructed sample to determine a first intermediate sample value; apply a second stage ALF to the reconstructed sample by determining a second class index for the reconstructed sample; select a second filter from a second set of filters based on the second class index, applying the second filter to the reconstructed sample to determine a first sample modification value, and determining a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value; and determine a filtered reconstructed sample based on the reconstructed sample and the first and second sample modification values.

Description

具有固定濾波器的自我調整迴路濾波器Self-tuning loop filter with fixed filter

本專利申請案主張以下權益: 於2021年2月11日提出申請的美國臨時專利申請案63/148,538;及 於2020年12月23日提出申請的美國臨時專利申請案63/130, 275, 上述每個美國臨時專利申請案的全部內容經由引用的方式合併入本文。 This patent application claims the following rights: U.S. Provisional Patent Application 63/148,538, filed on February 11, 2021; and U.S. Provisional Patent Application 63/130,275, filed December 23, 2020, The entire contents of each of the aforementioned US Provisional Patent Applications are incorporated herein by reference.

本案內容係關於視訊編碼和視訊解碼。The content of this case is about video encoding and video decoding.

數位視訊能力可以被合併到各種各樣的設備中,包括數位電視機、數位直播系統、無線廣播系統、個人數位助理(PDA)、膝上型電腦或桌上型電腦、平板電腦、電子書閱讀器、數位相機、數位記錄設備、數位媒體播放機、視訊遊戲裝置、視訊遊戲控制台、蜂巢或衛星無線電電話(所謂的「智慧型電話」)、視訊電話會議設備、視訊流送設備等。數位視訊設備實現視訊譯碼技術(諸如在由MPEG-2、MPEG-4、ITU-T H.263、ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4(第10部分,高級視訊譯碼(AVC))、ITU-T H.265/高效率視訊譯碼(HEVC)所定義的標準以及此類標準的擴展中描述的那些技術)。經由實現此類視訊譯碼技術,視訊設備可以更加高效地發送、接收、編碼、解碼及/或儲存數位視訊資訊。Digital video capabilities can be incorporated into a wide variety of devices, including digital televisions, digital broadcast systems, wireless broadcasting systems, personal digital assistants (PDAs), laptop or desktop computers, tablet computers, e-book readers devices, digital cameras, digital recording equipment, digital media players, video game devices, video game consoles, cellular or satellite radio telephones (so-called "smart phones"), video teleconferencing equipment, video streaming equipment, etc. Digital video equipment implementing video coding techniques (such as those described in MPEG-2, MPEG-4, ITU-T H.263, ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4 (Part 10, Advanced Video Coding (AVC)) , the standards defined by ITU-T H.265/High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) and those techniques described in extensions to such standards). By implementing such video decoding techniques, video devices can transmit, receive, encode, decode and/or store digital video information more efficiently.

視訊譯碼技術包括空間(圖片內)預測及/或時間(圖片間)預測以減少或去除在視訊序列中固有的冗餘。對於基於塊的視訊譯碼,視訊切片(例如,視訊圖片或視訊圖片的一部分)可以被分割為視訊塊,視訊塊亦可以被稱為譯碼樹單元(CTU)、譯碼單元(CU)及/或譯碼節點。圖片的經訊框內解碼(I)的切片中的視訊塊是使用相對於同一圖片中的相鄰塊中的參考取樣的空間預測來編碼的。圖片的經訊框間解碼(P或B)的切片中的視訊塊可以使用相對於同一圖片中的相鄰塊中的參考取樣的空間預測或者相對於其他參考圖片中的參考取樣的時間預測。圖片可以被稱為訊框,並且參考圖片可以被稱為參考訊框。Video coding techniques include spatial (intra-picture) prediction and/or temporal (inter-picture) prediction to reduce or remove redundancy inherent in video sequences. For block-based video coding, a video slice (eg, a video picture or a portion of a video picture) may be partitioned into video blocks, which may also be referred to as coding tree units (CTUs), coding units (CUs), and / or decoding node. Video blocks in an intra-frame decoded (I) slice of a picture are encoded using spatial prediction relative to reference samples in neighboring blocks in the same picture. Video blocks in inter-frame decoded (P or B) slices of a picture may use spatial prediction relative to reference samples in neighboring blocks in the same picture or temporal prediction relative to reference samples in other reference pictures. A picture may be referred to as a frame, and a reference picture may be referred to as a reference frame.

根據本案內容的技術,視訊解碼器可以被配置為執行兩階段自我調整迴路濾波。對於第一階段ALF,視訊解碼器可以被配置為決定用於正在被濾波的重建取樣的活動值和方向值。活動值通常可以指示在被濾波的取樣周圍的取樣鄰域中的取樣值的變型。方向值通常可以指示其中取樣值正在變化的方向,例如,取樣值是否在水平方向增加、在垂直方向增加、在45度方向增加、在135度方向增加、或者根本不增加。基於活動值和方向值,視訊解碼器可以決定用於濾波的取樣的類別索引。類別索引可以與來自第一組濾波器的一個濾波器相關聯,並且,每個濾波器是由系數值的形狀和集合來定義。視訊解碼器可以基於位元串流中包括的語法來決定第一組濾波器以及哪些分類器映射到哪些濾波器。視訊解碼器可以將濾波器應用於重建取樣,以決定第一中間取樣值。In accordance with the techniques disclosed herein, a video decoder may be configured to perform two-stage self-adjusting loop filtering. For the first stage ALF, the video decoder may be configured to determine activity and orientation values for the reconstructed samples being filtered. The activity value may generally indicate a variation of sample values in the sample neighborhood around the filtered sample. The direction value may generally indicate the direction in which the sample value is changing, eg, whether the sample value is increasing horizontally, vertically, at 45 degrees, at 135 degrees, or not at all. Based on the activity value and the direction value, the video decoder can determine the class index of the filtered samples. A class index may be associated with a filter from the first set of filters, and each filter is defined by the shape and set of coefficient values. The video decoder can decide the first set of filters and which classifiers map to which filters based on the syntax included in the bitstream. The video decoder may apply a filter to the reconstructed samples to determine the first intermediate sample value.

對於第二階段ALF,視訊解碼器經由將第二濾波器應用於重建取樣來決定第一取樣修改值,並且基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值。隨後,視訊解碼器基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值來決定經濾波的重建取樣。經由如本文所述,將第一階段ALF應用於重建塊的重建取樣並且將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣,本案內容的技術可以經由考慮視訊資料的局部特徵比單階段ALF做得更好,來提高經解碼視訊資料的整體品質。For the second stage ALF, the video decoder determines a first sample modification value by applying a second filter to the reconstructed samples, and determines a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value. The video decoder then determines the filtered reconstructed samples based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value and the second sample modification value. By applying the first-stage ALF to the reconstructed samples of the reconstruction block and the second-stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, as described herein, the techniques of the present case can do better than single-stage ALF by taking into account the local features of the video data, to improve the overall quality of the decoded video data.

根據一個實例,一種對視訊資料進行解碼的方法包括:將第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF)應用於重建塊的重建取樣,其中應用第一階段ALF包括:決定用於重建取樣的第一類別索引;基於第一類別索引來從第一組濾波器中選擇濾波器;及,將來自第一組濾波器的濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一中間取樣值;將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣,其中應用第二階段ALF包括:決定用於重建取樣的第二類別索引;基於第二類別索引,來從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器;將第二濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一取樣修改值;基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值;及,基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值來決定經濾波的重建取樣。According to one example, a method of decoding video data includes applying a first stage self-adjusting loop filter (ALF) to reconstructed samples of a reconstruction block, wherein applying the first stage ALF includes determining a first stage for reconstructing samples class index; selecting a filter from the first set of filters based on the first class index; and applying the filter from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine the first intermediate sample value; applying the second stage ALF in reconstructed sampling, wherein applying the second stage ALF comprises: determining a second class index for the reconstructed sampling; selecting a second filter from a second set of filters based on the second class index; applying the second filter to The reconstructed samples are used to determine a first sample modification value; a second sample modification value is determined based on the first intermediate sample value; and a filtered reconstructed sample is determined based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value.

根據一個實例,一種用於解碼視訊資料的設備包括:被配置為儲存視訊資料的記憶體;在電路中實施並且被配置為以下操作的一或多個處理器:向重建塊的重建取樣的應用第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF),其中為了應用第一階段ALF,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:用於重建取樣的第一類別索引;基於第一類別索引,來從第一組濾波器中選擇濾波器;並且向重建取樣應用來自第一組濾波器的濾波器,以決定第一中間取樣值;向重建取樣應用第二階段ALF,其中為了應用第二階段ALF,一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的第二類別索引;基於第二類別索引,從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器;向重建取樣應用第二濾波器以決定第一取樣修改值;基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值;及,基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值來決定經濾波的重建取樣。According to one example, an apparatus for decoding video data includes: memory configured to store video data; one or more processors implemented in circuitry and configured to: apply reconstruction samples to reconstruction blocks A first-stage self-adjusting loop filter (ALF), wherein to apply the first-stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: reconstruct a first class index of samples; selecting filters from the first set of filters; and applying filters from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine a first intermediate sample value; applying a second stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, wherein to apply the second stage ALF, The one or more processors are also configured to: determine a second class index for the reconstructed samples; select a second filter from the second set of filters based on the second class index; apply the second filter to the reconstructed samples to A first sample modification value is determined; a second sample modification value is determined based on the first intermediate sample value; and a filtered reconstructed sample is determined based on the reconstructed sample, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value.

根據一個實例,一種電腦可讀取儲存媒體儲存指令,當該等指令由一或多個處理器執行時,使該一或多個處理器用於:向重建塊的重建取樣應用第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF),其中為了應用第一階段ALF,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的第一類別索引;基於第一類別索引來從第一組濾波器中選擇濾波器;及,將來自第一組濾波器的濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一中間取樣值;向重建取樣應用第二階段ALF,其中為了應用第二階段ALF,一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的第二類別索引;基於第二類別索引來從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器;向重建取樣應用第二濾波器以決定第一取樣修改值;基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值;及,基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值,來決定經濾波的重建取樣。According to one example, a computer-readable storage medium stores instructions that, when executed by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to: apply first-stage self-adjustment to reconstructed samples of reconstructed blocks an in-loop filter (ALF), wherein to apply the first stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determine a first class index for reconstructing samples; and, applying filters from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine a first intermediate sample value; applying a second-stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, wherein in order to apply the second-stage ALF, one or more The processor is also configured to: determine a second class index for the reconstructed samples; select a second filter from the second set of filters based on the second class index; apply the second filter to the reconstructed samples to determine the first sample a modification value; determining a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value; and determining a filtered reconstructed sample based on the reconstructed sample, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value.

在附圖和以下描述中闡述了一或多個實例的細節。根據描述、附圖和請求項,其他特徵、目的和優點將是顯而易見的。The details of one or more examples are set forth in the accompanying drawings and the description below. Other features, objects and advantages will be apparent from the description, drawings and claims.

視訊譯碼(例如,視訊編碼及/或視訊解碼)通常涉及從同一圖片中已譯碼的視訊資料區塊(亦即,訊框內預測)或不同圖片中的已譯碼的視訊塊(亦即,訊框間預測)來預測視訊資料區塊。在一些情況下,視訊轉碼器亦經由將預測塊與原始塊進行比較來計算殘差資料。因此,殘差資料表示預測塊和原始塊之間的差異。視訊轉碼器對殘差資料進行變換和量化,並在經編碼的位元串流中用訊號發送經變換和量化的殘差資料。視訊解碼器將殘差資料添加到預測塊以產生比單獨預測塊更匹配的原始視訊塊的經重建的視訊塊。為了進一步提高解碼視訊的品質,視訊解碼器可以對經重建的視訊塊執行一或多個濾波操作。這些濾波操作的實例包括去塊濾波、取樣自我調整偏移(SAO)濾波和自我調整迴路濾波(ALF)。用於這些濾波操作的參數可以由視訊轉碼器來決定並在經編碼的視訊位元串流中顯式地用訊號發送,或者可以由視訊解碼器隱式決定而不需要在經編碼的視訊位元串流中顯式地用訊號發送。Video coding (eg, video encoding and/or video decoding) typically involves coded blocks of video data from the same picture (ie, in-frame prediction) or coded blocks of video in different pictures (ie, in-frame prediction). That is, inter-frame prediction) to predict blocks of video data. In some cases, the video transcoder also computes residual data by comparing the predicted block to the original block. Therefore, residual data represents the difference between the predicted block and the original block. The video transcoder transforms and quantizes the residual data, and signals the transformed and quantized residual data in the encoded bitstream. The video decoder adds residual data to the prediction block to produce a reconstructed video block that better matches the original video block than the prediction block alone. To further improve the quality of the decoded video, the video decoder may perform one or more filtering operations on the reconstructed video blocks. Examples of these filtering operations include deblocking filtering, sample self-adjusting offset (SAO) filtering, and self-adjusting loop filtering (ALF). The parameters used for these filtering operations may be determined by the video transcoder and signaled explicitly in the encoded video bitstream, or may be determined implicitly by the video decoder without requiring a signal in the encoded video bitstream. Explicitly signaled in the bitstream.

本案內容描述了與在視訊編碼及/或視訊解碼程序中對重建視訊資料進行濾波相關聯的技術,並且更具體地,本案內容描述了與ALF相關的技術。然而,所描述的技術亦可以潛在地應用於其他濾波方案。The subject matter describes techniques associated with filtering reconstructed video data in video encoding and/or video decoding procedures, and more particularly, the subject matter describes techniques related to ALF. However, the described techniques can potentially be applied to other filtering schemes as well.

根據本發明的技術,視訊解碼器可以被配置為執行兩階段自我調整迴路濾波。對於第一階段ALF,視訊解碼器可以被配置為決定用於被濾波的重建取樣的活動值和方向值。活動值通常可以指示在被濾波的取樣周圍的取樣附近中的取樣值的變化。方向值通常可以指示取樣值變化的方向,例如取樣值是否在水平方向增加、在垂直方向增加、在45度方向增加、在135度方向增加、或者根本不增加。基於活動值和方向值,視訊解碼器可以決定正在被濾波的取樣的類別索引。類別索引可以與來自第一組濾波器的濾波器相關聯,其中每個濾波器是由系數值的形狀和集合來定義的。視訊解碼器可以基於位元串流中包括的語法來決定第一組濾波器以及哪些分類器映射到哪些濾波器。視訊解碼器可以將濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一中間取樣值。In accordance with the techniques of this disclosure, a video decoder may be configured to perform two-stage self-adjusting loop filtering. For the first stage ALF, the video decoder may be configured to determine activity and orientation values for the filtered reconstructed samples. The activity value may generally indicate a change in the sample value in the vicinity of the sample around the filtered sample. The direction value can generally indicate the direction in which the sample value changes, such as whether the sample value increases horizontally, vertically, at 45 degrees, at 135 degrees, or not at all. Based on the activity value and the direction value, the video decoder can determine the class index of the sample being filtered. Class indices may be associated with filters from the first set of filters, where each filter is defined by the shape and set of coefficient values. The video decoder can decide the first set of filters and which classifiers map to which filters based on the syntax included in the bitstream. The video decoder may apply a filter to the reconstructed samples to determine the first intermediate sample value.

對於第二階段ALF,視訊解碼器經由將第二濾波器應用於重建取樣來決定第一取樣修改值,以及,基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值。隨後,視訊解碼器基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值來決定經濾波的重建取樣。如本文所述,經由將第一階段ALF應用於重建塊的重建取樣並將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣,本案內容的技術可以經由考慮視訊資料的局部特徵比單個階段ALF做得更好,來提高經解碼視訊資料的整體品質。For the second stage ALF, the video decoder determines a first sample modification value by applying a second filter to the reconstructed samples, and determines a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value. The video decoder then determines the filtered reconstructed samples based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value and the second sample modification value. As described herein, by applying a first-stage ALF to the reconstructed samples of the reconstruction block and a second-stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, the techniques disclosed in this case can do better than single-stage ALF by taking into account the local characteristics of the video data, to improve the overall quality of the decoded video data.

圖1是示出可以執行本案內容的技術的實例視訊編碼和解碼系統100的方塊圖。概括而言,本案內容的技術涉及對視訊資料進行譯碼(編碼及/或解碼)。通常,視訊資料包括用於處理視訊的任何資料。因此,視訊資料可以包括原始的未經編碼的視訊、經編碼的視訊、經解碼(例如,經重建)的視訊、以及視訊中繼資料(例如,訊號傳遞資料)。FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an example video encoding and decoding system 100 that may implement the techniques disclosed herein. In general, the technology of the subject matter involves the decoding (encoding and/or decoding) of video data. Generally, video data includes any data used to process video. Thus, video data may include original unencoded video, encoded video, decoded (eg, reconstructed) video, and video metadata (eg, signaling data).

如圖1中所示,在該實例中,系統100包括源設備102,源設備102提供要被目的地設備116解碼和顯示的、經編碼的視訊資料。具體地,源設備102經由電腦可讀取媒體110來將視訊資料提供給目的地設備116。源設備102和目的地設備116可以包括各種各樣的設備中的任何一種,包括桌上型電腦、筆記本(亦即,膝上型)電腦、行動設備、平板電腦、機上盒、諸如智慧型電話之類的電話手機、電視機、相機、顯示設備、數位媒體播放機、視訊遊戲控制台、視訊流送設備、廣播接收器設備等。在一些情況下,源設備102和目的地設備116可以被配備用於無線通訊,並且因此可以被稱為無線通訊設備。As shown in FIG. 1 , in this example, system 100 includes source device 102 that provides encoded video material to be decoded and displayed by destination device 116 . Specifically, source device 102 provides video material to destination device 116 via computer-readable medium 110 . Source device 102 and destination device 116 may include any of a wide variety of devices, including desktop computers, notebook (ie, laptop) computers, mobile devices, tablet computers, set-top boxes, such as smart Telephone handsets such as telephones, televisions, cameras, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices, broadcast receiver devices, etc. In some cases, source device 102 and destination device 116 may be equipped for wireless communication, and thus may be referred to as wireless communication devices.

在圖1的實例中,源設備102包括視訊源104、記憶體106、視訊轉碼器200以及輸出介面108。目的地設備116包括輸入介面122、視訊解碼器300、記憶體120以及顯示設備118。根據本案內容,源設備102的視訊轉碼器200和目的地設備116的視訊解碼器300可以被配置為以本文描述的方式應用用於使用第一和第二階段的自我調整迴路濾波的技術。因此,源設備102表示視訊編碼設備的實例,而目的地設備116表示視訊解碼設備的實例。在其他實例中,源設備和目的地設備可以包括其他部件或佈置。例如,源設備102可以從諸如外部相機之類的外部視訊源接收視訊資料。同樣,目的地設備116可以與外部顯示設備對接,而不是包括整合顯示設備。In the example of FIG. 1 , source device 102 includes video source 104 , memory 106 , video transcoder 200 , and output interface 108 . Destination device 116 includes input interface 122 , video decoder 300 , memory 120 , and display device 118 . In accordance with the teachings, video transcoder 200 of source device 102 and video decoder 300 of destination device 116 may be configured to apply techniques for self-adjusting loop filtering using first and second stages in the manner described herein. Thus, source device 102 represents an instance of a video encoding device, and destination device 116 represents an instance of a video decoding device. In other instances, the source and destination devices may include other components or arrangements. For example, source device 102 may receive video material from an external video source, such as an external camera. Likewise, the destination device 116 may interface with an external display device instead of including an integrated display device.

如圖1所示的系統100僅是一個實例。通常,任何數位視訊編碼及/或解碼設備可以執行用於本文描述的自我調整迴路濾波的技術。源設備102和目的地設備116僅是此類譯碼設備的實例,其中源設備102產生經譯碼的視訊資料以用於傳輸給目的地設備116。本案內容將「解碼」設備代表為執行對資料的譯碼(例如,編碼及/或解碼)的設備。因此,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300分別表示解碼設備(具體地,視訊轉碼器和視訊解碼器)的實例。在一些實例中,源設備102和目的地設備116可以以基本上對稱的方式進行操作,使得源設備102和目的地設備116中的每一個皆包括視訊編碼和解碼用部件。因此,系統100可以支援在源設備102與目的地設備116之間的單向或雙向視訊傳輸,例如,以用於視訊資料串流、視訊重播、視訊廣播或視訊電話。The system 100 shown in FIG. 1 is but one example. In general, any digital video encoding and/or decoding device can perform the techniques for self-adjusting loop filtering described herein. Source device 102 and destination device 116 are merely examples of such decoding devices, where source device 102 generates decoded video material for transmission to destination device 116 . The context of this case refers to a "decoding" device as a device that performs decoding (eg, encoding and/or decoding) of data. Thus, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 respectively represent examples of decoding devices (specifically, a video transcoder and a video decoder). In some examples, source device 102 and destination device 116 may operate in a substantially symmetrical manner, such that source device 102 and destination device 116 each include components for video encoding and decoding. Thus, system 100 can support one-way or two-way video transmission between source device 102 and destination device 116, eg, for video data streaming, video playback, video broadcasting, or video telephony.

通常,視訊源104表示視訊資料(即原始的未經解碼的視訊資料)的源,並且將視訊資料的順序的一系列圖片(亦被稱為「訊框」)提供給視訊轉碼器200,視訊轉碼器200對用於圖片的資料進行編碼。源設備102的視訊源104可以包括視訊擷取裝置,諸如攝像機、包含先前擷取的原始視訊的視訊存檔單元、及/或用於從視訊內容提供者接收視訊的視訊饋送介面。作為另外的替代方式,視訊源104可以產生基於電腦圖形的資料作為源視訊,或者產生即時視訊、被存檔的視訊和電腦產生的視訊的組合。在每種情況下,視訊轉碼器200可以對被擷取的、預擷取的或電腦產生的視訊資料進行編碼。視訊轉碼器200可以將圖片從所接收的順序(有時被稱為「顯示順序」)重新排列為用於譯碼的譯碼順序。視訊轉碼器200可以產生包括經編碼的視訊資料的位元串流。隨後,源設備102可以經由輸出介面108將經編碼的視訊資料輸出到電腦可讀取媒體110上,以便由例如目的地設備116的輸入介面122接收及/或取回。Typically, video source 104 represents a source of video data (ie, raw undecoded video data) and provides a sequential series of pictures (also referred to as "frames") of video data to video transcoder 200, Video transcoder 200 encodes data for pictures. The video source 104 of the source device 102 may include a video capture device, such as a video camera, a video archive unit containing previously captured raw video, and/or a video feed interface for receiving video from a video content provider. As a further alternative, the video source 104 may generate computer graphics-based material as the source video, or a combination of real-time video, archived video, and computer-generated video. In each case, video transcoder 200 may encode captured, pre-fetched or computer-generated video data. Video transcoder 200 may rearrange the pictures from the received order (sometimes referred to as "display order") to the decoding order for decoding. Video transcoder 200 may generate a bitstream including encoded video data. The source device 102 may then output the encoded video data to the computer-readable medium 110 via the output interface 108 for reception and/or retrieval by, for example, the input interface 122 of the destination device 116 .

源設備102的記憶體106和目的地設備116的記憶體120表示通用記憶體。在一些實例中,記憶體106、120可以儲存原始視訊資料,例如,來自視訊源104的原始視訊以及來自視訊解碼器300的原始的經解碼的視訊資料。補充或替代地,記憶體106、120可以儲存可由例如視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300分別執行的軟體指令。儘管在該實例中記憶體106和記憶體120被示為與視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300分開,但是應當理解的是,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300亦可以包括用於在功能上類似或等效目的的內部記憶體。此外,記憶體106、120可以儲存例如從視訊轉碼器200輸出並且輸入到視訊解碼器300的經編碼的視訊資料。在一些實例中,記憶體106、120的部分可以被分配為一或多個視訊緩衝器,例如,以儲存原始的經解碼及/或經編碼的視訊資料。Memory 106 of source device 102 and memory 120 of destination device 116 represent general purpose memory. In some examples, memories 106 , 120 may store raw video data, eg, raw video from video source 104 and raw decoded video data from video decoder 300 . Additionally or alternatively, the memories 106, 120 may store software instructions executable by, for example, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300, respectively. Although memory 106 and memory 120 are shown separate from video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 in this example, it should be understood that video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may also include Internal memory for a functionally similar or equivalent purpose. In addition, the memories 106 , 120 may store, for example, encoded video data output from the video transcoder 200 and input to the video decoder 300 . In some examples, portions of memory 106, 120 may be allocated as one or more video buffers, eg, to store raw decoded and/or encoded video data.

電腦可讀取媒體110可以表示能夠將經編碼的視訊資料從源設備102輸送到目的地設備116的任何類型的媒體或設備。在一個實例中,電腦可讀取媒體110表示通訊媒體,其使得源設備102能夠例如經由射頻網路或基於電腦的網路,來即時地向目的地設備116直接發送經編碼的視訊資料。根據諸如無線通訊協定之類的通訊標準,輸出介面108可以對包括經編碼的視訊資料的傳輸訊號進行調制,並且輸入介面122可以對所接收的傳輸訊號進行解調。通訊媒體可以包括任何無線或有線通訊媒體,例如,射頻(RF)頻譜或一或多條實體傳輸線。通訊媒體可以形成諸如以下各項的基於封包的網路的一部分:區域網路、廣域網、或諸如網際網路之類的全球網路。通訊媒體可以包括路由器、交換機、基地台、或對於促進從源設備102到目的地設備116的通訊而言可以有用的任何其他設備。Computer-readable media 110 may represent any type of media or device capable of transporting encoded video material from source device 102 to destination device 116 . In one example, computer-readable medium 110 represents a communication medium that enables source device 102 to send encoded video data directly to destination device 116 in real time, such as via a radio frequency network or a computer-based network. The output interface 108 can modulate the transmission signal including the encoded video data, and the input interface 122 can demodulate the received transmission signal according to a communication standard, such as a wireless communication protocol. Communication media may include any wireless or wired communication media, eg, the radio frequency (RF) spectrum or one or more physical transmission lines. The communication medium may form part of a packet-based network such as a local area network, a wide area network, or a global network such as the Internet. Communication media may include routers, switches, base stations, or any other device that may be useful for facilitating communication from source device 102 to destination device 116 .

在一些實例中,源設備102可以將經編碼的資料從輸出介面108輸出到存放裝置112。類似地,目的地設備116可以經由輸入介面122從存放裝置112存取經編碼的資料。存放裝置112可以包括各種分散式或本端存取的資料儲存媒體中的任何一種,諸如硬碟、藍光光碟、DVD、CD-ROM、快閃記憶體、揮發性或非揮發性記憶體、或用於儲存經編碼的視訊資料的任何其他適當的數位儲存媒體。In some examples, source device 102 may output encoded data from output interface 108 to storage device 112 . Similarly, destination device 116 may access encoded data from storage device 112 via input interface 122 . Storage device 112 may include any of a variety of distributed or locally accessible data storage media, such as hard disks, Blu-ray discs, DVDs, CD-ROMs, flash memory, volatile or non-volatile memory, or Any other suitable digital storage medium for storing encoded video data.

在一些實例中,源設備102可以將經編碼的視訊資料輸出到檔案伺服器114或者可以儲存由源設備102產生的經編碼的視訊資料的另一中間存放裝置。目的地設備116可以經由資料串流或下載來從檔案伺服器114存取被儲存的視訊資料。In some examples, source device 102 may output the encoded video data to file server 114 or another intermediate storage device that may store the encoded video data generated by source device 102 . The destination device 116 may access the stored video data from the file server 114 via data streaming or downloading.

檔案伺服器114可以是能夠儲存經編碼的視訊資料並且將該經編碼的視訊資料發送給目的地設備116的任何類型的伺服器設備。檔案伺服器114可以表示網頁伺服器(例如,用於網站)、被配置為提供檔案傳輸通訊協定服務(諸如,檔案傳輸通訊協定(FTP)或單向傳輸檔案傳輸(FLUTE)協定)的伺服器、內容傳遞網路(CDN)設備、超本文傳輸協定(HTTP)伺服器、多媒體廣播多播服務(MBMS)或增強型MBMS(eMBMS)伺服器、及/或網路額外儲存(NAS)設備。補充地或替代地,檔案伺服器114可以實施一或多個HTTP流傳輸協定,例如,經由HTTP的動態自我調整流傳輸(DASH)、HTTP即時流(HLS)、即時資料流送通訊協定(RTSP)、HTTP動態流等。File server 114 may be any type of server device capable of storing encoded video data and sending the encoded video data to destination device 116 . File server 114 may represent a web server (eg, for a website), a server configured to provide file transfer protocol services, such as file transfer protocol (FTP) or file transfer over one-way transfer (FLUTE) protocol , Content Delivery Network (CDN) devices, Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) servers, Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) or Enhanced MBMS (eMBMS) servers, and/or Network Additional Storage (NAS) devices. Additionally or alternatively, file server 114 may implement one or more HTTP streaming protocols, eg, Dynamic Self-Adjusting Streaming over HTTP (DASH), HTTP Real-Time Streaming (HLS), Real-Time Data Streaming Protocol (RTSP) ), HTTP dynamic streaming, etc.

目的地設備116可以經由任何標準資料連接(包括網際網路連接)來從檔案伺服器114存取經編碼的視訊資料。這可以包括適於存取被儲存在檔案伺服器114上的經編碼的視訊資料的無線通道(例如,Wi-Fi連接)、有線連接(例如,數位用戶線路(DSL)、纜線數據機等)、或這兩者的組合。輸入介面122可以被配置為根據上面論述的用於從檔案伺服器114取回或接收媒體資料的各種協定中的任何一或多個協定或者用於取回媒體資料的其他此類協定來操作。The destination device 116 may access the encoded video data from the file server 114 via any standard data connection, including an Internet connection. This may include wireless channels (eg, Wi-Fi connections), wired connections (eg, digital subscriber line (DSL), cable modems, etc.) suitable for accessing encoded video data stored on file server 114 ), or a combination of the two. Input interface 122 may be configured to operate in accordance with any one or more of the various protocols discussed above for retrieving or receiving media data from file server 114 or other such protocols for retrieving media data.

輸出介面108和輸入介面122可以表示無線發射器/接收器、數據機、有線聯網單元(例如,乙太網路卡)、根據各種IEEE 802.11標準中的任何一種標準進行操作的無線通訊部件、或其他實體部件。在其中輸出介面108和輸入介面122包括無線部件的實例中,輸出介面108和輸入介面122可以被配置為根據蜂巢通訊標準(諸如4G、4G-LTE(長期進化)、改進的LTE、5G等)來傳輸資料(諸如經編碼的視訊資料)。在其中輸出介面108包括無線發射器的一些實例中,輸出介面108和輸入介面122可以被配置為根據其他無線標準(諸如IEEE 802.11規範、IEEE 802.15規範(例如,ZigBee™)、藍芽™標準等)來傳輸資料(諸如經編碼的視訊資料)。在一些實例中,源設備102及/或目的地設備116可以包括相應的片上系統(SoC)設備。例如,源設備102可以包括用於執行被賦予視訊轉碼器200及/或輸出介面108的功能的SoC設備,並且目的地設備116可以包括用於執行被賦予視訊解碼器300及/或輸入介面122的功能的SoC設備。Output interface 108 and input interface 122 may represent wireless transmitters/receivers, modems, wired networking units (eg, Ethernet cards), wireless communication components operating in accordance with any of the various IEEE 802.11 standards, or other solid parts. In examples in which output interface 108 and input interface 122 include wireless components, output interface 108 and input interface 122 may be configured in accordance with cellular communication standards (such as 4G, 4G-LTE (Long Term Evolution), LTE-Advanced, 5G, etc.) to transmit data (such as encoded video data). In some instances where output interface 108 includes a wireless transmitter, output interface 108 and input interface 122 may be configured in accordance with other wireless standards such as the IEEE 802.11 specification, the IEEE 802.15 specification (eg, ZigBee™), the Bluetooth™ standard, and the like ) to transmit data (such as encoded video data). In some examples, source device 102 and/or destination device 116 may include respective system-on-chip (SoC) devices. For example, source device 102 may include an SoC device for performing the functions assigned to video transcoder 200 and/or output interface 108, and destination device 116 may include an SoC device for executing functions assigned to video decoder 300 and/or input interface 122-capable SoC devices.

本案內容的技術可以應用於視訊譯碼,以支援各種多媒體應用中的任何一種,諸如空中電視廣播、有線電視傳輸、衛星電視傳輸、網際網路流送視訊傳輸(諸如基於HTTP的動態自我調整資料流送(DASH))、被編碼到資料儲存媒體上的數位視訊、對被儲存在資料儲存媒體上的數位視訊的解碼、或其他應用。The techniques described in this case can be applied to video decoding to support any of a variety of multimedia applications, such as over-the-air television broadcasting, cable television transmission, satellite television transmission, Internet streaming video transmission (such as HTTP-based dynamic self-adjusting data streaming (DASH)), encoding digital video onto data storage media, decoding digital video stored on data storage media, or other applications.

目的地設備116的輸入介面122從電腦可讀取媒體110(例如,通訊媒體、存放裝置112、檔案伺服器114等)接收經編碼的視訊位元串流。經編碼的視訊位元串流110可以包括由視訊轉碼器200定義的諸如以下語法元素之類的訊號傳遞資訊(其亦被視訊解碼器300使用):該等語法元素具有描述視訊塊或其他譯碼單元(例如,切片、圖片、圖片組、序列等)的特性及/或處理的值。顯示設備118將經解碼的視訊資料的經解碼的圖片顯示給使用者。顯示設備118可以表示各種顯示設備中的任何一種,諸如CRT、液晶顯示器(LCD)、電漿顯示器、有機發光二極體(OLED)顯示器、或另一種類型的顯示設備。The input interface 122 of the destination device 116 receives the encoded video bitstream from the computer-readable medium 110 (eg, communication medium, storage device 112, file server 114, etc.). Encoded video bitstream 110 may include signaling information such as syntax elements defined by video transcoder 200 (which are also used by video decoder 300): Values of properties and/or processing of coding units (eg, slices, pictures, groups of pictures, sequences, etc.). Display device 118 displays the decoded picture of the decoded video material to the user. Display device 118 may represent any of a variety of display devices, such as a CRT, a liquid crystal display (LCD), a plasma display, an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, or another type of display device.

儘管在圖1中未圖示,但是在一些實例中,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以各自與音訊編碼器及/或音訊解碼器整合,並且可以包括適當的MUX-DEMUX單元或其他硬體及/或軟體,以處理包括公共資料串流中的音訊和視訊兩者的經多工的流。若適用,MUX-DEMUX單元可以遵循ITU H.223多工器協定或其他協定(諸如使用者資料包通訊協定(UDP))。Although not shown in FIG. 1, in some examples, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may each be integrated with an audio encoder and/or audio decoder, and may include appropriate MUX-DEMUX units or other Hardware and/or software to process multiplexed streams including both audio and video in the common data stream. MUX-DEMUX units may conform to the ITU H.223 multiplexer protocol or other protocols such as User Data Packet Protocol (UDP), if applicable.

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300各自可以被實現為各種適當的編碼器及/或解碼器電路中的任何一種,諸如一或多個微處理器、數位訊號處理器(DSP)、特殊應用積體電路(ASIC)、現場可程式設計閘陣列(FPGA)、個別邏輯、軟體、硬體、韌體、或其任何組合。當該技術部分地用軟體實現時,設備可以將用於軟體的指令儲存在適當的非暫時性電腦可讀取媒體中,並且使用一或多個處理器,用硬體來執行指令以執行本案內容的技術。視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300中的每一者可以被包括在一或多個編碼器或解碼器中,編碼器或解碼器中的任一者可以被整合為相應設備中的組合編碼器/解碼器(CODEC)的一部分。包括視訊轉碼器200及/或視訊解碼器300的設備可以包括積體電路、微處理器、及/或無線通訊設備(諸如蜂巢式電話)。Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may each be implemented as any of a variety of suitable encoder and/or decoder circuits, such as one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application-specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs), individual logic, software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When the techniques are implemented in part in software, the device may store instructions for the software in a suitable non-transitory computer-readable medium and execute the instructions in hardware, using one or more processors, to carry out the invention content technology. Each of the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be included in one or more encoders or decoders, either of which may be integrated into a combined encoding in a corresponding device part of the encoder/decoder (CODEC). Devices including video transcoder 200 and/or video decoder 300 may include integrated circuits, microprocessors, and/or wireless communication devices such as cellular telephones.

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以根據視訊譯碼標準(諸如ITU-T H.265(亦被稱為高效率視訊譯碼(HEVC)標準)或對其的擴展(諸如多視圖及/或可伸縮視訊解碼擴展))進行操作。可選地,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以根據其他專有或行業標準(例如,ITU-T H.266,亦被稱為多功能視訊譯碼(VVC))進行操作。VVC標準的草案是在ITU-T SG 16 WP 3和ISO/IEC JTC 1/SC 29/WG 11的聯合視訊專家組(JVET)於2020年6月22日至7月1日經由電話會議的第18次會議,JVET-S2001-v17,Bross等人的「Versatile Video Coding(Draft 10)」(後面被稱為「VVC Draft 10」)中描述的。然而,本案內容的技術不限於任何具體的譯碼標準,而且,明確預期本文描述的技術可以與VVC的後續標準相結合使用。Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be based on video coding standards such as ITU-T H.265 (also known as High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard) or extensions thereto such as multi-view and/or or Scalable Video Decoding Extension)) to operate. Alternatively, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may operate according to other proprietary or industry standards (eg, ITU-T H.266, also known as Versatile Video Coding (VVC)). The draft of the VVC standard was presented at the first meeting of the Joint Video Experts Group (JVET) of ITU-T SG 16 WP 3 and ISO/IEC JTC 1/SC 29/WG 11 via teleconference from 22 June to 1 July 2020 Session 18, JVET-S2001-v17, described in "Versatile Video Coding (Draft 10)" by Bross et al. (hereinafter referred to as "VVC Draft 10"). However, the techniques disclosed herein are not limited to any particular coding standard, and it is expressly contemplated that the techniques described herein may be used in conjunction with subsequent standards for VVC.

通常,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以執行對圖片的基於塊的譯碼。術語「塊」通常代表包括要被處理的(例如,在編碼及/或解碼程序中要被編碼、被解碼或以其他方式使用的)資料的結構。例如,塊可以包括亮度及/或色度資料的取樣的二維矩陣。通常,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以對以YUV(例如,Y、Cb、Cr)格式表示的視訊資料進行解碼。亦即,並不是對用於圖片的取樣的紅色、綠色和藍色(RGB)資料進行譯碼,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以對亮度和色度分量進行解碼,其中色度分量可以包括紅色色相和藍色色相色度分量兩者。在一些實例中,視訊轉碼器200在進行編碼之前將所接收的經RGB格式化的資料轉換為YUV表示,並且視訊解碼器300將YUV表示轉換為RGB格式。可選地,預處理和後處理單元(未圖示)可以執行這些轉換。In general, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may perform block-based coding of pictures. The term "block" generally refers to a structure that includes data to be processed (eg, to be encoded, decoded, or otherwise used in an encoding and/or decoding process). For example, a block may include a two-dimensional matrix of samples of luma and/or chroma data. Generally, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 can decode video data represented in YUV (eg, Y, Cb, Cr) format. That is, instead of decoding red, green, and blue (RGB) data for sampling of a picture, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may decode luma and chroma components, where the chroma components Both red hue and blue hue chrominance components may be included. In some examples, video transcoder 200 converts the received RGB-formatted data to a YUV representation before encoding, and video decoder 300 converts the YUV representation to RGB format. Optionally, preprocessing and postprocessing units (not shown) may perform these transformations.

本案內容可以通常涉及對圖片的譯碼(例如,編碼和解碼)以包括對圖片的資料進行編碼或解碼的程序。類似地,本案內容可以涉及對圖片的塊的譯碼以包括對用於塊的資料進行編碼或解碼(例如,預測及/或殘差譯碼)的程序。經編碼的視訊位元串流通常包括用於表示譯碼決策(例如,譯碼模式)以及將圖片分割為塊的語法元素的一系列值。因此,關於對圖片或塊進行譯碼的引用通常應當被理解為對用於形成圖片或塊的語法元素的值進行譯碼。The subject matter may generally relate to the decoding (eg, encoding and decoding) of a picture to include procedures for encoding or decoding the material of the picture. Similarly, the subject matter may relate to the coding of blocks of pictures to include procedures for encoding or decoding (eg, prediction and/or residual coding) data for the blocks. An encoded video bitstream typically includes a series of values for syntax elements that represent coding decisions (eg, coding modes) and partition the picture into blocks. Accordingly, references to coding a picture or block should generally be understood as coding the values of syntax elements used to form the picture or block.

HEVC定義了各種塊,包括譯碼單元(CU)、預測單元(PU)和變換單元(TU)。根據HEVC,視訊解碼器(諸如視訊轉碼器200)根據四叉樹結構來將譯碼樹單元(CTU)分割為CU。亦即,視訊解碼器將CTU和CU分割為四個相等的、不重疊的正方形,並且四叉樹的每個節點具有零個或四個子節點。沒有子節點的節點可以被稱為「葉節點」,並且這種葉節點的CU可以包括一或多個PU及/或一或多個TU。視訊解碼器可以進一步分割PU和TU。例如,在HEVC中,殘差四叉樹(RQT)表示對TU的分區。在HEVC中,PU表示訊框間預測資料,而TU表示殘差資料。經訊框內預測的CU包括訊框內預測資訊,諸如訊框內模式指示。HEVC defines various blocks, including coding units (CUs), prediction units (PUs), and transform units (TUs). According to HEVC, a video decoder, such as video transcoder 200, partitions coding tree units (CTUs) into CUs according to a quad-tree structure. That is, the video decoder partitions CTUs and CUs into four equal, non-overlapping squares, and each node of the quadtree has zero or four child nodes. A node without child nodes may be referred to as a "leaf node," and a CU of such a leaf node may include one or more PUs and/or one or more TUs. Video decoders can further partition PUs and TUs. For example, in HEVC, a residual quadtree (RQT) represents the partitioning of TUs. In HEVC, PU stands for inter-frame prediction data, and TU stands for residual data. An intra-frame predicted CU includes intra-frame prediction information, such as an intra-frame mode indication.

作為另一實例,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為根據VVC進行操作。根據VVC,視訊解碼器(諸如,視訊轉碼器200)將圖片分割為複數個譯碼樹單元(CTU)。視訊轉碼器200可以根據樹結構(諸如,四叉樹-二叉樹(QTBT)結構或多類型樹(MTT)結構)來分割CTU。QTBT結構去除了多種分割類型的概念,諸如在HEVC的CU、PU和TU之間的分隔。QTBT結構包括兩個級別:根據四叉樹分割而被分割的第一級別、以及根據二叉樹分割而被分割的第二級別。QTBT結構的根節點對應於CTU。二叉樹的葉節點對應於譯碼單元(CU)。As another example, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to operate according to VVC. According to VVC, a video decoder, such as video transcoder 200, partitions a picture into a plurality of coding tree units (CTUs). The video transcoder 200 may partition the CTUs according to a tree structure, such as a quadtree-binary tree (QTBT) structure or a multi-type tree (MTT) structure. The QTBT structure removes the concept of various partition types, such as the partition between CUs, PUs and TUs of HEVC. The QTBT structure includes two levels: a first level partitioned according to quadtree partitioning, and a second level partitioned according to binary tree partitioning. The root node of the QTBT structure corresponds to the CTU. The leaf nodes of the binary tree correspond to coding units (CUs).

在MTT分割結構中,可以使用四叉樹(QT)分割、二叉樹(BT)分割以及一或多個類型的三叉樹(TT)(亦被稱為三元樹(TT))分割來對塊進行分割。三叉樹或三元樹分割是其中塊被分為三個子塊的分割。在一些實例中,三叉樹或三元樹分割將塊劃分為三個子塊,而不經由中心劃分原始塊。MTT中的分割類型(例如,QT、BT和TT)可以是對稱的或不對稱的。In an MTT partition structure, blocks may be partitioned using quadtree (QT) partitions, binary tree (BT) partitions, and one or more types of ternary tree (TT) (also known as triple tree (TT)) partitions segmentation. A ternary tree or ternary tree partition is a partition in which a block is divided into three sub-blocks. In some examples, ternary tree or ternary tree partitioning divides the block into three sub-blocks without dividing the original block via the center. Segmentation types (eg, QT, BT, and TT) in MTT can be symmetric or asymmetric.

在一些實例中,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以使用單個QTBT或MTT結構來表示亮度分量和色度分量中的每一者,而在其他實例中,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以使用兩個或兩個以上QTBT或MTT結構,諸如用於亮度分量的一個QTBT/MTT結構以及用於兩個色度分量的另一個QTBT/MTT結構(或者用於相應色度分量的兩個QTBT/MTT結構)。In some examples, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may use a single QTBT or MTT structure to represent each of the luma and chroma components, while in other examples, video transcoder 200 and video decoder The generator 300 may use two or more QTBT or MTT structures, such as one QTBT/MTT structure for the luma component and another QTBT/MTT structure for the two chroma components (or one for the corresponding chroma components). two QTBT/MTT structures).

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為使用每HEVC的四叉樹分割、QTBT分割、MTT分割、或其他分割結構。為了解釋的目的,關於QTBT分割提供了本案內容的技術的描述。然而,應當理解的是,本案內容的技術亦可以應用於被配置為使用四叉樹分割或者亦使用其他類型的分割的視訊解碼器。Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to use per-HEVC quadtree partitioning, QTBT partitioning, MTT partitioning, or other partitioning structures. For explanatory purposes, a description of the techniques of the present case is provided with respect to QTBT segmentation. It should be understood, however, that the techniques of this disclosure may also be applied to video decoders configured to use quad-tree partitioning, or other types of partitioning as well.

在一些實例中,CTU包括:亮度取樣的譯碼樹塊(CTB)、具有三個取樣陣列的圖片的色度取樣的兩個相應CTB,或者黑白圖片或使用三個獨立的色彩平面和用於對取樣進行編碼的語法結構進行譯碼的圖片的取樣的CTB。一個CTB可以是針對某個N值的取樣的NxN塊,使得一個分量到多個CTB的劃分是一次分割。一個分量是來自以4:2:0、4:2:2或4:4:4顏色格式構成一張圖片的三個陣列(亮度和兩個色度)之一的陣列或單個取樣、或者是構成黑白格式的圖片的陣列或陣列的單個取樣。在一些實例中,譯碼塊是針對一些值M和N的取樣的M×N塊,使得一個CTB到多個譯碼塊的劃分是一次分割。In some examples, a CTU includes a coding tree block (CTB) of luma samples, two corresponding CTBs of chroma samples of a picture with three sample arrays, or a black and white picture or using three separate color planes and for The CTB of the sample of the picture that decodes the syntax structure that encodes the sample. A CTB may be an NxN block of samples for some N value, such that the partitioning of a component into multiple CTBs is a partition. A component is an array or a single sample from one of the three arrays (luminance and two chrominance) that make up a picture in 4:2:0, 4:2:2, or 4:4:4 color format, or An array or individual samples of an array that make up a picture in black and white format. In some examples, a coding block is an MxN block of samples for some values of M and N, such that the partitioning of one CTB into multiple coding blocks is a partition.

可以以各種方式在圖片中對塊(例如,CTU或CU)進行群組。舉一個實例,磚塊(brick)可以代表圖片中的特定瓦片(tile)內的CTU行的矩形區域。瓦片可以是圖片中的特定瓦片列和特定瓦片行內的CTU的矩形區域。瓦片列代表CTU的矩形區域,其具有等於圖片的高度的高度以及由語法元素(例如,諸如在圖片參數集中)指定的寬度。瓦片行代表CTU的矩形區域,其具有由語法元素指定的高度(例如,諸如在圖片參數集中)以及等於圖片的寬度的寬度。Blocks (eg, CTUs or CUs) may be grouped in a picture in various ways. As an example, a brick may represent a rectangular area of a CTU row within a particular tile in the picture. A tile can be a rectangular area of a CTU within a specific tile column and a specific tile row in the picture. A tile column represents a rectangular area of a CTU that has a height equal to the height of the picture and a width specified by a syntax element (eg, such as in a picture parameter set). A tile row represents a rectangular area of a CTU that has a height specified by a syntax element (eg, such as in a picture parameter set) and a width equal to the width of the picture.

在一些實例中,可以將一個瓦片分割為多個磚塊,每個磚塊可以包括瓦片內的一或多個CTU行。沒有被分割為多個磚塊的瓦片亦可以被稱為磚塊。然而,作為瓦片的真實子集的磚塊可以不被稱為瓦片。In some instances, a tile can be divided into tiles, each tile can include one or more CTU rows within the tile. Tiles that are not divided into bricks can also be called bricks. However, bricks that are a true subset of tiles may not be called tiles.

圖片中的磚塊亦可以以切片來排列。切片可以是圖片的整數個磚塊,其可以唯一地被包含在單個網路抽象層(NAL)單元中。在一些實例中,切片包括多個完整的瓦片或者僅包括一個瓦片的完整磚塊的連續序列。The bricks in the picture can also be arranged in slices. A slice can be an integer number of bricks of a picture, which can be uniquely contained in a single Network Abstraction Layer (NAL) unit. In some instances, a slice includes multiple complete tiles or a contiguous sequence of complete bricks that includes only one tile.

本案內容可以互換地使用「NxN」和「N乘N」來代表塊(諸如CU或其他視訊塊)在垂直和水平維度態樣的取樣大小,例如,16x16個取樣或16乘16個取樣。通常,16x16 CU將在垂直方向上具有16個取樣(y = 16),並且在水平方向上將具有16個取樣(x = 16)。同樣地,NxN CU通常在垂直方向上具有N個取樣,並且在水平方向上具有N個取樣,其中N表示非負整數值。CU中的取樣可以按行和列來排列。此外,CU不一定需要在水平方向上具有與在垂直方向上相同的數量的取樣。例如,CU可以包括NxM個取樣,其中M不一定等於N。This document may use "NxN" and "N by N" interchangeably to represent the sample size of a block (such as a CU or other video block) in vertical and horizontal dimension, eg, 16x16 samples or 16 by 16 samples. Typically, a 16x16 CU will have 16 samples vertically (y=16) and 16 samples horizontally (x=16). Likewise, an NxN CU typically has N samples in the vertical direction and N samples in the horizontal direction, where N represents a non-negative integer value. The samples in the CU can be arranged in rows and columns. Furthermore, a CU does not necessarily need to have the same number of samples in the horizontal direction as in the vertical direction. For example, a CU may include NxM samples, where M is not necessarily equal to N.

視訊轉碼器200對用於CU的表示預測及/或殘差資訊以及其他資訊的視訊資料進行編碼。預測資訊指示將如何預測CU以便形成用於CU的預測塊。殘差資訊通常表示在編碼之前的CU的取樣與預測塊之間的逐個取樣差。Video transcoder 200 encodes video data representing prediction and/or residual information and other information for the CU. Prediction information indicates how the CU is to be predicted in order to form a prediction block for the CU. Residual information typically represents the sample-by-sample differences between the samples of the CU prior to encoding and the prediction block.

為了預測CU,視訊轉碼器200通常可以經由訊框間預測或訊框內預測來形成用於CU的預測塊。訊框間預測通常代表根據先前譯碼的圖片的資料來預測CU,而訊框內預測通常代表根據同一圖片的先前譯碼的資料來預測CU。為了執行訊框間預測,視訊轉碼器200可以使用一或多個運動向量來產生預測塊。視訊轉碼器200通常可以執行運動搜尋,以辨識例如在CU與參考塊之間的差異態樣與CU緊密匹配的參考塊。視訊轉碼器200可以使用絕對差之和(SAD)、平方差之和(SSD)、平均絕對差(MAD)、均方差(MSD)、或其他這種差計算來計算差度量,以決定參考塊是否與當前CU緊密匹配。在一些實例中,視訊轉碼器200可以使用單向預測或雙向預測來預測當前CU。To predict a CU, video transcoder 200 may typically form prediction blocks for the CU through inter-frame prediction or intra-frame prediction. Inter-frame prediction generally refers to predicting a CU from data from previously coded pictures, while intra-frame prediction generally refers to predicting a CU from previously coded data of the same picture. To perform inter-frame prediction, video transcoder 200 may use one or more motion vectors to generate prediction blocks. Video transcoder 200 may typically perform a motion search to identify reference blocks that closely match the CU, eg, the difference aspect between the CU and the reference block. Video transcoder 200 may use sum of absolute differences (SAD), sum of squared differences (SSD), mean absolute differences (MAD), mean square deviations (MSD), or other such difference calculations to calculate a difference metric to determine the reference block Whether it closely matches the current CU. In some examples, video transcoder 200 may predict the current CU using uni-directional prediction or bi-directional prediction.

VVC的一些實例亦提供仿射運動補償模式,其可以被認為是訊框間預測模式。在仿射運動補償模式下,視訊轉碼器200可以決定表示非平移運動(諸如,放大或縮小、旋轉、透視運動或其他不規則的運動類型)的兩個或兩個以上運動向量。Some examples of VVC also provide an affine motion compensation mode, which can be thought of as an inter-frame prediction mode. In affine motion compensation mode, video transcoder 200 may determine two or more motion vectors that represent non-translational motion, such as zoom-in or zoom-out, rotation, perspective motion, or other irregular motion types.

為了執行訊框內預測,視訊轉碼器200可以選擇訊框內預測模式來產生預測塊。VVC的一些實例提供六十七種訊框內預測模式,包括各種方向性模式、以及平面模式和DC模式。通常,視訊轉碼器200選擇訊框內預測模式,訊框內預測模式描述要根據其來預測當前塊(例如,CU的塊)的取樣的、當前塊的相鄰取樣。假定視訊轉碼器200以光柵掃瞄順序(從左到右、從上到下)對CTU和CU進行解碼,則此類取樣通常可以是在與當前塊相同的圖片中在當前塊的上方、左上方或左側。To perform intra-frame prediction, video transcoder 200 may select an intra-frame prediction mode to generate prediction blocks. Some examples of VVC provide sixty-seven intra-frame prediction modes, including various directional modes, as well as planar and DC modes. Typically, video transcoder 200 selects an intra-frame prediction mode that describes the adjacent samples of the current block from which samples of the current block (eg, a block of a CU) are to be predicted. Assuming that video transcoder 200 decodes CTUs and CUs in raster scan order (left-to-right, top-to-bottom), such samples may typically be above the current block in the same picture as the current block, top left or left.

視訊轉碼器200對表示用於當前塊的預測模式的資料進行編碼。例如,對於訊框間預測模式,視訊轉碼器200可以對表示使用各種可用訊框間預測模式中的哪一種的資料以及用於對應模式的運動資訊進行編碼。對於單向或雙向訊框間預測,例如,視訊轉碼器200可以使用高級運動向量預測(AMVP)或合併模式來對運動向量進行編碼。視訊轉碼器200可以使用類似的模式來對用於仿射運動補償模式的運動向量進行編碼。Video transcoder 200 encodes data representing the prediction mode for the current block. For example, for an inter-frame prediction mode, video transcoder 200 may encode data indicating which of the various available inter-frame prediction modes to use and motion information for the corresponding mode. For uni-directional or bi-directional inter-frame prediction, for example, video transcoder 200 may use Advanced Motion Vector Prediction (AMVP) or merge mode to encode motion vectors. Video transcoder 200 may use a similar mode to encode motion vectors for affine motion compensation mode.

在諸如對塊的訊框內預測或訊框間預測之類的預測之後,視訊轉碼器200可以計算用於該塊的殘差資料。殘差資料(諸如殘差塊)表示在塊與用於該塊的預測塊之間的逐個取樣差,該預測塊是使用對應的預測模式來形成的。視訊轉碼器200可以將一或多個變換應用於殘差塊,以在變換域中而非在取樣域中產生經變換的資料。例如,視訊轉碼器200可以將離散餘弦變換(DCT)、整數變換、小波變換或概念上類似的變換應用於殘差視訊資料。另外,視訊轉碼器200可以在第一變換之後應用二次變換,諸如模式相關的不可分離二次變換(MDNSST)、訊號相關變換、Karhunen-Loeve變換(KLT)等。視訊轉碼器200在應用一或多個變換之後產生變換係數。After prediction, such as intra-frame prediction or inter-frame prediction for a block, video transcoder 200 may compute residual data for the block. Residual data, such as a residual block, represent the sample-by-sample differences between the block and the prediction block for that block, which was formed using the corresponding prediction mode. Video transcoder 200 may apply one or more transforms to the residual block to produce transformed data in the transform domain rather than the sample domain. For example, video transcoder 200 may apply a discrete cosine transform (DCT), integer transform, wavelet transform, or conceptually similar transform to the residual video data. Additionally, the video transcoder 200 may apply a secondary transform, such as Mode Dependent Non-Separable Secondary Transform (MDNSST), Signal Dependent Transform, Karhunen-Loeve Transform (KLT), etc., after the first transform. Video transcoder 200 generates transform coefficients after applying one or more transforms.

如前述,在任何變換以產生變換係數之後,視訊轉碼器200可以執行對變換係數的量化。量化通常代表如下的程序:在該程序中,對變換係數進行量化以可能減少用於表示這些變換係數的資料量,從而提供進一步的壓縮。經由執行量化程序,視訊轉碼器200可以減小與一些或所有變換係數相關聯的位元深度。例如,視訊轉碼器200可以在量化期間將 n位元的值向下捨入為 m位元的值,其中 n大於 m。在一些實例中,為了執行量化,視訊轉碼器200可以執行對要被量化的值的按位元右移。 As previously described, after any transform to generate transform coefficients, video transcoder 200 may perform quantization of the transform coefficients. Quantization generally represents a procedure in which transform coefficients are quantized to possibly reduce the amount of data used to represent these transform coefficients, thereby providing further compression. By performing a quantization procedure, video transcoder 200 may reduce the bit depth associated with some or all transform coefficients. For example, video transcoder 200 may round down an n- bit value to an m -bit value during quantization, where n is greater than m . In some examples, to perform quantization, video transcoder 200 may perform a bitwise right shift of the value to be quantized.

在量化之後,視訊轉碼器200可以掃瞄變換係數,從而從包括經量化的變換係數的二維矩陣產生一維向量。可以將掃瞄設計為將較高能量(並且因此較低頻率)的變換係數放在向量的前面,並且將較低能量(並且因此較高頻率)的變換係數放在向量的後面。在一些實例中,視訊轉碼器200可以利用預定義的掃瞄順序來掃瞄經量化的變換係數以產生經序列化的向量,並且隨後對向量的經量化的變換係數進行熵編碼。在其他實例中,視訊轉碼器200可以執行自我調整掃瞄。在掃瞄經量化的變換係數以形成一維向量之後,視訊轉碼器200可以例如根據上下文自我調整二進位算術譯碼(CABAC)來對一維向量進行熵編碼。視訊轉碼器200亦可以對用於描述與經編碼的視訊資料相關聯的中繼資料的語法元素的值進行熵編碼,以供視訊解碼器300在對視訊資料進行解碼時使用。After quantization, video transcoder 200 may scan the transform coefficients to generate a one-dimensional vector from a two-dimensional matrix including the quantized transform coefficients. A scan can be designed to place higher energy (and therefore lower frequency) transform coefficients at the front of the vector, and lower energy (and therefore higher frequency) transform coefficients at the back of the vector. In some examples, video transcoder 200 may scan the quantized transform coefficients using a predefined scan order to generate a serialized vector, and then entropy encode the quantized transform coefficients of the vector. In other examples, the video transcoder 200 may perform a self-adjusting scan. After scanning the quantized transform coefficients to form a one-dimensional vector, video transcoder 200 may entropy encode the one-dimensional vector, eg, according to context self-adjusting binary arithmetic coding (CABAC). Video transcoder 200 may also entropy encode the values of syntax elements used to describe metadata associated with the encoded video data for use by video decoder 300 in decoding the video data.

為了執行CABAC,視訊轉碼器200可以將上下文模型內的上下文分配給要被發送的符號。上下文可以涉及例如符號的相鄰值是否為零值。概率決定可以是基於被分配給符號的上下文的。To perform CABAC, video transcoder 200 may assign contexts within a context model to symbols to be transmitted. The context may relate, for example, to whether adjacent values of a symbol are zero-valued. Probabilistic decisions may be based on the context assigned to the symbol.

視訊轉碼器200亦可以例如在圖片標頭、塊標頭、切片標頭中為視訊解碼器300產生語法資料(諸如基於塊的語法資料、基於圖片的語法資料和基於序列的語法資料)、或其他語法資料(諸如序列參數集(SPS)、圖片參數集(PPS)或視訊參數集(VPS))。同樣地,視訊解碼器300可以對此類語法資料進行解碼以決定如何解碼對應的視訊資料。Video transcoder 200 may also generate syntax data (such as block-based syntax data, picture-based syntax data, and sequence-based syntax data) for video decoder 300, eg, in picture headers, block headers, slice headers, Or other syntax data (such as Sequence Parameter Set (SPS), Picture Parameter Set (PPS) or Video Parameter Set (VPS)). Likewise, the video decoder 300 can decode such syntax data to determine how to decode the corresponding video data.

以這種方式,視訊轉碼器200可以產生位元串流,其包括經編碼的視訊資料,例如,描述將圖片分割為塊(例如,CU)以及用於該塊的預測及/或殘差資訊的語法元素。最終,視訊解碼器300可以接收位元串流並且對經編碼的視訊資料進行解碼。In this manner, video transcoder 200 may generate a bitstream that includes encoded video data, eg, describing partitioning of a picture into blocks (eg, CUs) and predictions and/or residuals for the blocks Syntax elements of information. Finally, the video decoder 300 can receive the bitstream and decode the encoded video data.

通常,視訊解碼器300執行與由視訊轉碼器200執行的程序相反的程序,以對位元串流的經編碼的視訊資料進行解碼。例如,視訊解碼器300可以使用CABAC,以與視訊轉碼器200的CABAC編碼程序基本上類似的、但是相反的方式來對用於位元串流的語法元素的值進行解碼。語法元素可以定義用於將圖片分割為CTU、以及根據對應的分割結構(諸如,QTBT結構)對每個CTU進行分割,以定義CTU的CU的分割資訊。語法元素亦可以定義用於視訊資料的塊(例如,CU)的預測和殘差資訊。Typically, video decoder 300 performs the reverse of the process performed by video transcoder 200 to decode the encoded video data of the bitstream. For example, video decoder 300 may use CABAC to decode the values of syntax elements for a bitstream in a substantially similar but reversed manner as the CABAC encoding procedure of video transcoder 200. The syntax elements may define partitioning information for partitioning a picture into CTUs, and partitioning each CTU according to a corresponding partitioning structure, such as a QTBT structure, to define the CUs of the CTU. Syntax elements may also define prediction and residual information for blocks of video data (eg, CUs).

殘差資訊可以由例如經量化的變換係數來表示。視訊解碼器300可以對塊的經量化的變換係數進行逆量化和逆變換以重現用於該塊的殘差塊。視訊解碼器300使用經訊號通知的預測模式(訊框內預測或訊框間預測)和相關的預測資訊(例如,用於訊框間預測的運動資訊)來形成用於該塊的預測塊。視訊解碼器300隨後可以對預測塊和殘差塊(在逐個取樣的基礎上)進行組合以重現原始塊。視訊解碼器300可以執行額外處理,諸如執行去塊程序以減少沿著塊的邊界的視覺偽影。Residual information may be represented by, for example, quantized transform coefficients. Video decoder 300 may inverse quantize and inverse transform the quantized transform coefficients of a block to reproduce a residual block for the block. Video decoder 300 uses the signaled prediction mode (intra-frame prediction or inter-frame prediction) and associated prediction information (eg, motion information for inter-frame prediction) to form a prediction block for the block. Video decoder 300 may then combine the prediction block and the residual block (on a sample-by-sample basis) to reproduce the original block. Video decoder 300 may perform additional processing, such as performing deblocking procedures to reduce visual artifacts along block boundaries.

本案內容可以通常涉及「以訊號發送」某些資訊(諸如語法元素)。術語「以訊號發送」通常可以代表對用於語法元素的值及/或用於對經編碼的視訊資料進行解碼的其他資料的傳送。亦即,視訊轉碼器200可以在位元串流中以訊號發送用於語法元素的值。通常,以訊號發送代表在位元串流中產生值。如前述,源設備102可以基本上即時地或不是即時地(諸如,可能在將語法元素儲存到存放裝置112以供目的地設備116稍後取回時發生)將位元串流傳輸給目的地設備116。The content of the case may generally involve the "signaling" of certain information (such as grammatical elements). The term "signaling" may generally refer to the transmission of values for syntax elements and/or other data for decoding encoded video data. That is, video transcoder 200 may signal values for syntax elements in the bitstream. Typically, signaling means generating values in the bitstream. As previously described, source device 102 may stream the bitstream to the destination substantially instantaneously or not (such as may occur when syntax elements are stored to storage 112 for later retrieval by destination device 116) device 116 .

在視訊譯碼中,例如在H.266/VVC標準中,ALF被用於最小化在經濾波取樣和原始取樣之間的均方誤差。例如,用於ALF的輸入取樣可以是SAO的輸出取樣。ALF的輸出取樣可以被儲存在解碼圖片緩衝區(DPB)中或作為可視圖片進行輸出。聯合勘探模型(JEM)軟體中採用的ALF濾波器形狀是5x5、7x7和9x9菱形。可以在JEM中的圖片級別選擇和用訊號發送濾波器形狀。為了在譯碼效率和濾波器複雜度之間取得更好的折衷,在VVC中,亮度分量和色度分量分別僅支援7x7菱形和5x5菱形。In video coding, such as in the H.266/VVC standard, ALF is used to minimize the mean squared error between filtered samples and original samples. For example, the input samples for the ALF may be the output samples of the SAO. ALF output samples can be stored in the decoded picture buffer (DPB) or output as visible pictures. The ALF filter shapes used in the Joint Exploration Model (JEM) software are 5x5, 7x7 and 9x9 diamonds. Filter shapes can be selected and signaled at the picture level in JEM. In order to achieve a better compromise between decoding efficiency and filter complexity, in VVC, only 7x7 diamonds and 5x5 diamonds are supported for the luma and chroma components, respectively.

圖2A圖示實例濾波器140,其是7x7菱形濾波器。圖2B圖示實例濾波器142,其是5x5菱形濾波器。在濾波器140和142中的每一個中,整數係數

Figure 02_image001
以7位小數精度來表示。
Figure 02_image001
的絕對值是經由使用第0階指數哥倫布(Exp-Golomb)碼後面跟著用於非零係數的符號位元而被譯碼的。在圖2A和圖2B中,每個方塊對應一個亮度或色度取樣,並且中心方塊對應當前待濾波取樣。為了減少發送係數的管理負擔和乘法的次數,圖2A和圖2B中的濾波器形狀是點對稱的。另外,如等式(1)所示,所有濾波器係數之和被設置為128,其是具有7位小數精度的1.0的固定點表示。   
Figure 02_image003
(1)
2A illustrates an example filter 140, which is a 7x7 diamond filter. FIG. 2B illustrates an example filter 142, which is a 5x5 diamond filter. In each of filters 140 and 142, the integer coefficients
Figure 02_image001
Expressed with 7 decimal places of precision.
Figure 02_image001
The absolute value of is decoded using a 0th order Exp-Golomb code followed by a sign bit for the non-zero coefficients. In Figures 2A and 2B, each block corresponds to a luma or chroma sample, and the center block corresponds to the current sample to be filtered. In order to reduce the management burden of sending coefficients and the number of multiplications, the filter shapes in Figures 2A and 2B are point-symmetric. Additionally, as shown in equation (1), the sum of all filter coefficients is set to 128, which is a fixed point representation of 1.0 with 7 decimal places of precision.
Figure 02_image003
(1)

在等式(1)中,N是係數的數量,並且對於7x7和5x5濾波器形狀,N分別等於13和7。In equation (1), N is the number of coefficients and is equal to 13 and 7 for 7x7 and 5x5 filter shapes, respectively.

在VVC中,非線性被引入ALF。當相鄰取樣值與當前待濾波取樣值的差異過大時,應用簡單的修剪函數來減小相鄰取樣值的影響。為了對取樣進行濾波,ALF可以被執行為:   

Figure 02_image005
   (2) 其中R(x,y)是SAO之後的取樣值。 In VVC, nonlinearity is introduced into the ALF. When the difference between the adjacent sample value and the current sample value to be filtered is too large, a simple trimming function is applied to reduce the influence of the adjacent sample value. To filter the samples, ALF can be performed as:
Figure 02_image005
(2)
where R(x,y) is the sampled value after SAO.

用修剪函數將非線性函式定義為:   

Figure 02_image007
   (3) 其中j等於0或1,並且
Figure 02_image009
是第i個係數
Figure 02_image001
的濾波器分接點位置偏移。 Use the trim function to define the nonlinear function as:
Figure 02_image007
(3)
where j is equal to 0 or 1, and
Figure 02_image009
is the ith coefficient
Figure 02_image001
The filter tap position offset of .

在VVC版本1中,如等式(4)中所示,用於係數

Figure 02_image001
的修剪參數
Figure 02_image011
是由修剪索引
Figure 02_image013
決定的。BD是內部位元深度。   
Figure 02_image015
(4)
In VVC version 1, as shown in equation (4), for coefficients
Figure 02_image001
pruning parameters for
Figure 02_image011
is indexed by pruning
Figure 02_image013
decided. BD is the internal bit depth.
Figure 02_image015
(4)

對於濾波器,訊號係數的數量和訊號修剪索引的數量皆是N-1。每個係數皆限制在[-128, 127]的範圍內,其相當於具有7位小數精度的[-1.0, 1.0]。每個修剪索引

Figure 02_image013
可以是0、1、2或3,並且經由使用2位元固定長度碼用訊號發送。為了簡化修剪操作,如在等式(4)中,修剪參數
Figure 02_image011
的值可以被限制為僅為2的冪。因此,可以應用逐位元邏輯操作,作為修剪操作。 For the filter, the number of signal coefficients and the number of signal trim indices are both N-1. Each coefficient is restricted to the range [-128, 127], which is equivalent to [-1.0, 1.0] with 7 decimal places of precision. per pruned index
Figure 02_image013
Can be 0, 1, 2, or 3, and is signaled using a 2-bit fixed-length code. To simplify the pruning operation, as in equation (4), the pruning parameter
Figure 02_image011
The value of can be restricted to only powers of 2. Therefore, a bitwise logical operation can be applied as a trimming operation.

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為執行子塊級濾波器自我調整。在VVC版本1中,ALF遵循與JEM-7.0中的ALF相同的亮度分類框架。為了在譯碼效率和計算複雜度之間獲得更好的折衷,用於分類的塊大小可能會從2x2個取樣增加到4x4個取樣。為了決定4x4塊的類別索引,使用具有8x8亮度取樣的周圍訊窗來推導出方向和活動資訊。在這個8x8亮度取樣訊窗中,首先計算每隔一個取樣的四個梯度值,如圖3中所示。圖3圖示用於ALF分類的4x4子塊150的子取樣拉普拉斯值。計算標有圓點的取樣的梯度值。其他取樣的梯度值被設置為0。Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to perform sub-block level filter self-adjustment. In VVC version 1, ALF follows the same luminance classification framework as ALF in JEM-7.0. To obtain a better compromise between coding efficiency and computational complexity, the block size for classification may be increased from 2x2 samples to 4x4 samples. In order to determine the class index of the 4x4 block, a surrounding window with 8x8 luma samples is used to derive orientation and motion information. In this 8x8 luma sample window, four gradient values for every other sample are first calculated, as shown in Figure 3. Figure 3 illustrates the sub-sampled Laplacian values of the 4x4 sub-block 150 for ALF classification. Calculates the gradient value for the samples marked with dots. The gradient values of other samples are set to 0.

圖4圖示用於具有座標(k,l)的每個取樣的四個梯度值。點表示正在針對其計算梯度的取樣。塊160圖示水平梯度(H),並且塊162圖示垂直梯度(V)。塊164圖示135度梯度(D1),並且塊166圖示45度梯度(D2)。H、V、D1和D2被推導如下:   

Figure 02_image017
(5) Figure 4 illustrates four gradient values for each sample with coordinates (k,l). The dots represent the samples for which the gradient is being calculated. Block 160 illustrates the horizontal gradient (H), and block 162 illustrates the vertical gradient (V). Block 164 illustrates a 135 degree gradient ( D1 ), and block 166 illustrates a 45 degree gradient ( D2 ). H, V, D1 and D2 are derived as follows:
Figure 02_image017
(5)

變數i和變數j可以參考4x4塊中的左上角取樣的座標。計算出的水平梯度g H、垂直梯度g V、135度梯度g D1和45度梯度g D2的總和被計算如下:   

Figure 02_image019
(6) Variable i and variable j may refer to the coordinates of the upper left sample in the 4x4 block. The calculated sum of the horizontal gradient g H , the vertical gradient g V , the 135-degree gradient g D1 and the 45-degree gradient g D2 is calculated as follows:
Figure 02_image019
(6)

Figure 02_image021
表示的水平和垂直梯度的最大值和最小值之比,以及用
Figure 02_image023
表示的兩個對角線梯度的最大值和最小值之比,被計算如等式(7)中所示。   
Figure 02_image025
(7)
use
Figure 02_image021
represents the ratio of the maximum and minimum values of the horizontal and vertical gradients, and uses
Figure 02_image023
The ratio of the maximum and minimum values of the two diagonal gradients, represented, is calculated as shown in equation (7).
Figure 02_image025
(7)

隨後,將

Figure 02_image021
Figure 02_image023
彼此與兩個閾值
Figure 02_image027
Figure 02_image029
進行比較,以推導出方向性D: 步驟1:若
Figure 02_image031
Figure 02_image031
,則D被設置為0(紋理),否則繼續步驟2。 步驟2:若
Figure 02_image033
,則繼續步驟3,否則繼續步驟4。 步驟3:若
Figure 02_image035
,則D被設置為1(弱對角線),否則D被設置為2(強對角線)。 步驟4:若
Figure 02_image037
,則D被設置為3(弱水平/垂直),否則D被設置為4(強水平/垂直)。 Subsequently, the
Figure 02_image021
and
Figure 02_image023
each other with two thresholds
Figure 02_image027
and
Figure 02_image029
Compare to derive the directionality D: Step 1: If
Figure 02_image031
and
Figure 02_image031
, then D is set to 0 (texture), otherwise proceed to step 2. Step 2: If
Figure 02_image033
, go to step 3, otherwise go to step 4. Step 3: If
Figure 02_image035
, then D is set to 1 (weak diagonal), otherwise D is set to 2 (strong diagonal). Step 4: If
Figure 02_image037
, then D is set to 3 (weak horizontal/vertical), otherwise D is set to 4 (strong horizontal/vertical).

活動值 A計算如下:   

Figure 02_image039
(8) The activity value A is calculated as follows:
Figure 02_image039
(8)

圖5圖示將25個亮度類別合併成7個合併類別(0到6)的實例,其中每個方塊表示一個基於D和

Figure 02_image041
的值的類別。5x5網格170表示25個類別,並且5x5網格170的每個框內的數字表示從0到6的合併類別。每個類別,即5x5網格170之每一者方塊,可以具有從0到24的閉區間的索引。A被映射到0到4的閉區間,並且量化值被表示為 Â。因此,每個4x4塊被歸類到25個類別之一,如下所示:   
Figure 02_image043
(9)
Figure 5 illustrates an example of merging 25 luminance categories into 7 merged categories (0 to 6), where each square represents a
Figure 02_image041
The category of the value. The 5x5 grid 170 represents 25 categories, and the numbers within each box of the 5x5 grid 170 represent the combined categories from 0 to 6. Each category, ie each square of the 5x5 grid 170, may have an index of a closed interval from 0 to 24. A is mapped to a closed interval from 0 to 4, and the quantized value is denoted as  . Therefore, each 4x4 block is classified into one of 25 categories as follows:
Figure 02_image043
(9)

一個亮度濾波器組包含25個濾波器。然而,為了在保持譯碼效率的同時,減少表示濾波器係數所需要的位元數量,可以合併不同的類別,並且被合併的類別使用相同的濾波器。用訊號發出合併表格。在合併表格中,例如,使用固定長度碼用訊號發送用於每個類別的濾波器索引。用訊號發送用於圖5、7的亮度濾波器的實例濾波器組中。針對每個類別,在ALF_APS中用訊號發送濾波器索引(在本實例中,從0到6)。A luminance filter bank contains 25 filters. However, in order to reduce the number of bits required to represent filter coefficients while maintaining coding efficiency, different classes can be combined and the combined classes use the same filter. Consolidate tables are signaled. In the merge table, for example, the filter index for each class is signaled using a fixed length code. Signaling is used in the example filter banks of the luma filters of Figures 5 and 7. For each class, the filter index (in this example, from 0 to 6) is signaled in ALF_APS.

在基於4x4塊的類別索引C和合併表從亮度濾波器組決定濾波器之後,在對4x4塊的取樣進行濾波之前,可以依據針對4x4塊計算的梯度值來對濾波器應用幾何變換,如表1中所示。 表2 基於梯度值的幾何變換 梯度值 變換

Figure 02_image045
 並且
Figure 02_image047
無變換
Figure 02_image049
對角線翻轉
Figure 02_image051
垂直翻轉
Figure 02_image053
右旋轉
After the filter is determined from the luma filter bank based on the class index C of the 4x4 block and the merging table, before filtering the samples of the 4x4 block, a geometric transformation can be applied to the filter according to the gradient values calculated for the 4x4 block, as shown in the table shown in 1. Table 2 Geometric transformations based on gradient values gradient value transform
Figure 02_image045
and
Figure 02_image047
no transformation
Figure 02_image049
Diagonal flip
Figure 02_image051
flip vertically
Figure 02_image053
rotate right

圖6圖示圖2A中濾波器140的幾何變換的實例。如圖6中所示,濾波器180對應於濾波器140的對角線翻轉。濾波器182對應於濾波器140的垂直翻轉,並且濾波器184對應於濾波器140的右旋轉。FIG. 6 illustrates an example of a geometric transformation of filter 140 in FIG. 2A. As shown in FIG. 6 , filter 180 corresponds to a diagonal flip of filter 140 . Filter 182 corresponds to a vertical flip of filter 140 , and filter 184 corresponds to a right rotation of filter 140 .

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為執行譯碼樹塊級自我調整。在JEM-7.0中,向一個切片的所有亮度CTB應用僅僅一個亮度濾波器組,並且向一個切片的所有色度CTB應用僅僅一個色度濾波器。然而,有兩個潛在的缺點。首先,當CTB之間的統計資訊存在一定量的差異時,對顏色分量的所有CTB使用相同的濾波器或濾波器組可能會限制ALF的譯碼效率,尤其是針對大解析度序列和混合內容視訊序列。第二,當推動針對切片的濾波器時,直到收集整個切片的統計資訊才能計算濾波器。這種多遍次譯碼對於低延遲應用並不友好。為了解決這個問題,一種解決方案是使用來自先前譯碼切片的統計資料。但是,這可能會導致一些效能損失。Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to perform coding tree block-level self-adjustment. In JEM-7.0, only one luma filter bank is applied to all luma CTBs of a slice, and only one chroma filter is applied to all chroma CTBs of a slice. However, there are two potential drawbacks. First, when there is a certain amount of difference in statistics between CTBs, using the same filter or filter bank for all CTBs of a color component may limit the decoding efficiency of ALF, especially for high-resolution sequences and mixed content video sequence. Second, when pushing a filter for a slice, the filter cannot be computed until statistics for the entire slice are collected. This multi-pass decoding is not friendly to low-latency applications. To address this problem, one solution is to use statistics from previously coded slices. However, this may result in some performance loss.

除了亮度4x4塊級濾波器自我調整以外,VVC亦支援CTB級濾波器自我調整。在一個切片中,允許不同的亮度CTB使用不同的亮度濾波器組,並且不同的色度CTB可以使用不同的色度濾波器。具有相似統計資料的CTB可以使用相同的濾波器。該CTB級濾波器自我調整提高了譯碼效率,尤其是對於低延遲應用。此外,VVC版本1允許將來自先前譯碼圖片的濾波器用於CTB。該時間濾波器重用機制可以減少濾波器係數訊號傳遞的管理負擔。在VVC版本1中,最多可以向一個切片應用7個訊號亮度濾波器組和8個訊號色度濾波器。當沒有任何用訊號發送的濾波器時,可以將16個固定濾波器組之一應用於亮度CTB。當啟用ALF時,針對亮度CTB,固定濾波器組或訊號亮度濾波器組的濾波器組索引被用訊號發送。針對CTB,用訊號發送訊號色度濾波器的濾波器索引。經由使用從先前譯碼的圖片和固定濾波器用訊號發送的濾波器,當在低延遲應用中對當前CTU進行編碼時,可以經由僅使用當前CTU的統計資訊來決定3個CTU級別的開/關標誌和濾波器/濾波器組索引。因此,每個CTU的編碼位元串流可以即時產生,而無需等待整個圖片的統計資料可用。Besides luminance 4x4 block-level filter self-adjustment, VVC also supports CTB-level filter self-adjustment. Within a slice, different luma CTBs are allowed to use different luma filter banks, and different chroma CTBs can use different chroma filters. CTBs with similar statistics can use the same filter. The CTB stage filter self-adjustment improves decoding efficiency, especially for low-latency applications. Furthermore, VVC version 1 allows filters from previously coded pictures to be used for CTBs. The temporal filter reuse mechanism can reduce the management burden of filter coefficient signaling. In VVC version 1, up to 7 signal luminance filter banks and 8 signal chrominance filters can be applied to a slice. When there are no filters to signal, one of 16 fixed filter banks can be applied to the luma CTB. When ALF is enabled, the filter bank index of the fixed filter bank or the signal luminance filter bank is signaled for the luma CTB. For CTB, the filter index of the signal chroma filter is signaled. By using filters signaled from previously decoded pictures and fixed filters, 3 CTU levels can be decided on/off by using only statistics for the current CTU when encoding the current CTU in low latency applications Flags and filter/filterbank index. Thus, the coded bitstream for each CTU can be generated on the fly without waiting for statistics for the entire picture to be available.

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為執行用於行緩衝器減少的技術。如圖2A和圖2B中所示,在垂直方向上,濾波器形狀分別具有針對亮度分量的7個分接點和針對色度分量的5個分接點。因此,在VVC測試模型2.0(VTM-2.0)中,當解碼一行CTU時,由於解塊濾波器和SAO濾波器的延遲,上層CTU行的7條亮度線和4條色度線必須儲存在用於ALF的行緩衝器中。然而,額外的行緩衝器需要大的晶片面積,特別是對於高清(HD)和超高清(UHD)視訊序列。Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to perform techniques for line buffer reduction. As shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B , in the vertical direction, the filter shape has 7 tap points for the luma component and 5 tap points for the chroma component, respectively. Therefore, in VVC Test Model 2.0 (VTM-2.0), when decoding a row of CTUs, the 7 luma lines and 4 chrominance lines of the upper CTU row must be stored in the in the line buffer of the ALF. However, additional line buffers require large die area, especially for high-definition (HD) and ultra-high-definition (UHD) video sequences.

為了使ALF硬體友好(例如,經由減少線緩衝器要求),可以應用虛擬邊界(VB)的概念來去除針對ALF的所有線緩衝器管理負擔。考慮VVC版本1中的去塊濾波器和SAO濾波器,VB的位置是水平CTU邊界上方的4個亮度取樣和2個色度取樣。當對VB一側的一個取樣進行濾波時,無法利用VB的另一側的取樣,並且可以應用具有對稱取樣填充的經修改的濾波。To make the ALF hardware friendly (eg, by reducing line buffer requirements), the concept of virtual boundaries (VBs) can be applied to remove all line buffer management burdens for the ALF. Considering the deblocking filter and SAO filter in VVC version 1, the position of the VB is 4 luma samples and 2 chroma samples above the horizontal CTU boundary. When filtering one sample on one side of the VB, the samples on the other side of the VB cannot be utilized and modified filtering with symmetric sample padding can be applied.

圖7A-圖7C圖示用於在ALF VB處的亮度ALF濾波的對稱取樣填充的實例。在圖7A-圖7C的實例中,濾波器190的中心方塊是當前待濾波取樣的位置,並且粗線是VB(VB 192)的位置。在圖7A-圖7C中,填充了具有虛線的濾波器分接點位置。圖7A圖示其中濾波器190的一個濾波器分接點位置高於或低於VB 192的實例。在該實例中,填充了一個濾波器分接點位置。圖7B圖示其中濾波器190的4個濾波器分接點位置高於或低於VB 192的實例。在該實例中,填充了4個濾波器分接點位置。7A-7C illustrate an example of symmetric sample padding for luma ALF filtering at ALF VB. In the example of Figures 7A-7C, the center square of filter 190 is the position of the current sample to be filtered, and the thick line is the position of VB (VB 192). In Figures 7A-7C, filter tap locations are populated with dashed lines. FIG. 7A illustrates an example in which one of the filter taps of filter 190 is positioned above or below VB 192 . In this example, one filter tap location is populated. FIG. 7B illustrates an example in which the 4 filter taps of filter 190 are positioned above or below VB 192 . In this example, 4 filter tap locations are populated.

然而,當取樣位於VB 192的每一側的最近行上時,如圖7C中所示,2D濾波器相當於水平濾波器。這可能會引入視覺偽影。為了解決這個問題,當當前待濾波取樣位於VB的每一側的最近行上時,可以補償濾波器強度,如等式(10)中所示。將等式(10)與等式(2)進行比較,可以看出向右多移了3位元。   

Figure 02_image055
   (10) However, when the samples are on the nearest line on each side of the VB 192, as shown in Figure 7C, the 2D filter is equivalent to a horizontal filter. This may introduce visual artifacts. To solve this problem, the filter strength can be compensated when the current sample to be filtered is on the nearest row on each side of the VB, as shown in equation (10). Comparing Equation (10) with Equation (2), it can be seen that there is an extra shift of 3 bits to the right.
Figure 02_image055
(10)

當應用VB處理時,亦可以修改4x4塊的分類。當計算VB的一側的4x4塊的類別索引時,可以不使用VB的另一側上的梯度和取樣,如圖8中所示。The classification of 4x4 blocks can also be modified when VB processing is applied. Gradients and sampling on the other side of the VB may not be used when computing the class index of the 4x4 block on one side of the VB, as shown in FIG. 8 .

圖8圖示在ALF VB處的ALF 4x4子塊分類的實例。當計算與VB相鄰的取樣的梯度值時,無法利用VB的另一側的取樣。因此,當前側的邊界取樣被重複擴展,如圖8所示。亦即,VB的當前一側的邊界取樣被鏡像到VB的另一側。隨著可用梯度值的數量減少,等式(8)中的活動推導被重新縮放為:   

Figure 02_image057
(11) Figure 8 illustrates an example of ALF 4x4 sub-block classification at ALF VB. When calculating gradient values for samples adjacent to the VB, the samples on the other side of the VB cannot be utilized. Therefore, the boundary samples on the current side are repeatedly expanded, as shown in FIG. 8 . That is, the boundary samples on the current side of the VB are mirrored to the other side of the VB. As the number of available gradient values decreases, the activity derivation in equation (8) is rescaled to:
Figure 02_image057
(11)

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為執行濾波器係數訊號傳遞。在VVC版本1中,ALF係數是在ALF自我調整參數集(APS)中用訊號發送的。一個APS可以包含一組亮度濾波器,具有多達25個濾波器、多達8個色度濾波器和多達8個跨分量ALF(CC-ALF)濾波器。每組亮度濾波器支援將ALF應用於亮度25類別。在VVC版本1中,支援多達8個ALF_APS。Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to perform filter coefficient signaling. In VVC version 1, the ALF coefficients are signaled in the ALF Self-Tuning Parameter Set (APS). An APS can contain a set of luma filters, with up to 25 filters, up to 8 chroma filters, and up to 8 cross-component ALF (CC-ALF) filters. Each set of luma filters supports applying ALF to the luma 25 class. In VVC version 1, up to 8 ALF_APS are supported.

下文的表2圖示用於根據本案內容的技術用於用訊號發送濾波器係數的示例性語法訊號表格。 表 2 alf_data( ){ 描述符     alf_luma_filter_signal_flag u(1)     if( aps_chroma_present_flag ){             alf_chroma_filter_signal_flag u(1)          alf_cc_cb_filter_signal_flag u(1)          alf_cc_cr_filter_signal_flag u(1)     }        if( alf_luma_filter_signal_flag ){             alf_luma_clip_flag u(1)         alf_luma_num_filters_signalled_minus1 ue(v)          if( alf_luma_num_filters_signalled_minus1 > 0 )                 for( filtIdx = 0; filtIdx < NumAlfFilters; filtIdx++ )                     alf_luma_coeff_delta_idx[ filtIdx ] u(v)          for( sfIdx = 0; sfIdx  <=  alf_luma_num_filters_signalled_minus1; sfIdx++ )                 for( j = 0; j < 12; j++ ){                     alf_luma_coeff_abs[ sfIdx ][ j ] ue(v)                   if( alf_luma_coeff_abs[ sfIdx ][ j ] )                          alf_luma_coeff_sign[ sfIdx ][ j ] u(1)              }             if( alf_luma_clip_flag )                 for( sfIdx = 0; sfIdx  <=  alf_luma_num_filters_signalled_minus1; sfIdx++ )                      for( j = 0; j < 12; j++ )                          alf_luma_clip_idx[ sfIdx ][ j ] u(2)     }        if( alf_chroma_filter_signal_flag ){             alf_chroma_clip_flag u(1)          alf_chroma_num_alt_filters_minus1 ue(v)          for( altIdx = 0; altIdx  <=  alf_chroma_num_alt_filters_minus1; altIdx++ ){                 for( j = 0; j < 6; j++ ){                     alf_chroma_coeff_abs[ altIdx ][ j ] ue(v)                   if( alf_chroma_coeff_abs[ altIdx ][ j ] > 0 )                          alf_chroma_coeff_sign[ altIdx ][ j ] u(1)              }                 if( alf_chroma_clip_flag )                      for( j = 0; j < 6; j++ )                          alf_chroma_clip_idx[ altIdx ][ j ] u(2)          }        }        if( alf_cc_cb_filter_signal_flag ){             alf_cc_cb_filters_signalled_minus1 ue(v)          for( k = 0; k < alf_cc_cb_filters_signalled_minus1 + 1; k++ ){                 for( j = 0; j < 7; j++ ){                     alf_cc_cb_mapped_coeff_abs[ k ][ j ] u(3)                   if( alf_cc_cb_mapped_coeff_abs[ k ][ j ] )                          alf_cc_cb_coeff_sign[ k ][ j ] u(1)              }             }        }        if( alf_cc_cr_filter_signal_flag ){             alf_cc_cr_filters_signalled_minus1 ue(v)          for( k = 0; k < alf_cc_cr_filters_signalled_minus1 + 1; k++ ){                 for( j = 0; j < 7; j++ ){                     alf_cc_cr_mapped_coeff_abs[ k ][ j ] u(3)                   if( alf_cc_cr_mapped_coeff_abs[ k ][ j ] )                          alf_cc_cr_coeff_sign[ k ][ j ] u(1)              }             }        }    }    Table 2 below illustrates an example syntax signaling table for signaling filter coefficients in accordance with the techniques of the present disclosure. Table 2 alf_data(){ Descriptor alf_luma_filter_signal_flag u(1) if(aps_chroma_present_flag){ alf_chroma_filter_signal_flag u(1) alf_cc_cb_filter_signal_flag u(1) alf_cc_cr_filter_signal_flag u(1) } if(alf_luma_filter_signal_flag){ alf_luma_clip_flag u(1) alf_luma_num_filters_signalled_minus1 ue(v) if(alf_luma_num_filters_signalled_minus1>0) for( filtIdx = 0; filtIdx <NumAlfFilters; filtIdx++ ) alf_luma_coeff_delta_idx[filtIdx] u(v) for( sfIdx = 0; sfIdx <= alf_luma_num_filters_signalled_minus1; sfIdx++ ) for( j = 0; j <12; j++ ){ alf_luma_coeff_abs[ sfIdx ][ j ] ue(v) if(alf_luma_coeff_abs[sfIdx][j]) alf_luma_coeff_sign[ sfIdx ][ j ] u(1) } if(alf_luma_clip_flag) for( sfIdx = 0; sfIdx <= alf_luma_num_filters_signalled_minus1; sfIdx++ ) for( j = 0; j <12; j++ ) alf_luma_clip_idx[ sfIdx ][ j ] u(2) } if(alf_chroma_filter_signal_flag){ alf_chroma_clip_flag u(1) alf_chroma_num_alt_filters_minus1 ue(v) for(altIdx = 0; altIdx <= alf_chroma_num_alt_filters_minus1; altIdx++ ){ for( j = 0; j <6; j++ ){ alf_chroma_coeff_abs[altIdx][j] ue(v) if (alf_chroma_coeff_abs[altIdx][j] > 0) alf_chroma_coeff_sign[altIdx][j] u(1) } if(alf_chroma_clip_flag) for( j = 0; j <6; j++ ) alf_chroma_clip_idx[altIdx][j] u(2) } } if(alf_cc_cb_filter_signal_flag){ alf_cc_cb_filters_signalled_minus1 ue(v) for( k = 0; k < alf_cc_cb_filters_signalled_minus1 + 1; k++ ){ for( j = 0; j <7; j++ ){ alf_cc_cb_mapped_coeff_abs[ k ][ j ] u(3) if(alf_cc_cb_mapped_coeff_abs[ k ][ j ] ) alf_cc_cb_coeff_sign[ k ][ j ] u(1) } } } if(alf_cc_cr_filter_signal_flag){ alf_cc_cr_filters_signalled_minus1 ue(v) for( k = 0; k < alf_cc_cr_filters_signalled_minus1 + 1; k++ ){ for( j = 0; j <7; j++ ){ alf_cc_cr_mapped_coeff_abs[ k ][ j ] u(3) if(alf_cc_cr_mapped_coeff_abs[ k ][ j ] ) alf_cc_cr_coeff_sign[ k ][ j ] u(1) } } } }

本案內容描述了可以進一步提高ALF的效能的技術。例如,在VVC中,當對一個取樣進行濾波時,只能夠應用一個分類器和一個濾波器。然而,本案內容描述了用於應用多個分類器和濾波器來捕捉更多局部特徵的技術。本案內容描述了用於框架使用多個濾波器和分類器來對取樣進行濾波的技術。The content of this case describes techniques that can further improve the effectiveness of ALF. For example, in VVC, when filtering a sample, only one classifier and one filter can be applied. However, this case describes techniques for applying multiple classifiers and filters to capture more local features. The content of this case describes techniques for a framework to filter samples using multiple filters and classifiers.

圖9示出用於使用多個固定濾波器組和多個用訊號發送的濾波器組來對視訊資料的重建取樣進行濾波的實例框架。視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為根據圖9的技術實現多個固定濾波器和多個用訊號發送的濾波器。將關於視訊解碼器300描述圖10-圖15的技術,但該等技術亦可以由視訊轉碼器200執行。9 illustrates an example framework for filtering reconstructed samples of video data using multiple fixed filter banks and multiple signaled filter banks. Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to implement multiple fixed filters and multiple signaled filters in accordance with the techniques of FIG. 9 . The techniques of FIGS. 10-15 will be described with respect to video decoder 300 , but the techniques may also be performed by video transcoder 200 .

在圖9的實例中,視訊解碼器300將第一階段ALF 400應用於重建取樣R(x,y)以決定中間濾波訊號R’。隨後,視訊解碼器300將第二階段ALF 410應用於R’以決定濾波取樣430的值。In the example of Figure 9, the video decoder 300 applies the first stage ALF 400 to the reconstructed samples R(x,y) to determine the intermediate filtered signal R'. Subsequently, the video decoder 300 applies the second stage ALF 410 to R&apos; to determine the value of the filtered samples 430.

現在將更詳細地描述第一階段ALF 400的態樣。

Figure 02_image059
Figure 02_image061
表示可以向取樣應用的用訊號發送的濾波器組和固定(預定義)濾波器組的數量。Rs是對ALF的輸入取樣。 F(f, i)其中i = 0…N f-1表示第i個固定濾波器組 C(f, i)其中i = 0…N f-1 表示針對第i個固定濾波器組的分類器。經由C(f, i),對於每個取樣,計算濾波器索引。基於濾波器索引,從固定濾波器組F(f, i)中選擇濾波器來濾波該取樣。此外,C(f, i)決定如何將幾何變換應用於係數。 F(s, i)其中i = 0…N s-1表示第i個用訊號發送的濾波器組。 C(s, i)其中i = 0…N s-1表示具有第i個用訊號發送的濾波器組的分類器。經由C(s, i),對於每個取樣,計算濾波器索引。基於濾波器索引,從固定濾波器組F(s, i)中選擇濾波器來對該取樣進行濾波。此外,C(s, i)決定如何對係數應用幾何變換。 The aspect of the first stage ALF 400 will now be described in more detail.
Figure 02_image059
and
Figure 02_image061
Indicates the number of signaled filter banks and fixed (predefined) filter banks that can be applied to the sample. Rs is the input sample to the ALF. F(f, i) where i = 0...N f -1 denotes the ith fixed filter bank C(f, i) where i = 0...N f -1 denotes the classifier for the ith fixed filter bank . Via C(f, i), for each sample, the filter index is calculated. Based on the filter index, a filter is selected from the fixed filter bank F(f, i) to filter the sample. Furthermore, C(f, i) decides how the geometric transformation is applied to the coefficients. F(s, i) where i = 0...N s -1 denotes the ith signaled filter bank. C(s, i) where i = 0...N s -1 denotes the classifier with the ith signaled filter bank. Via C(s, i), for each sample, the filter index is calculated. Based on the filter index, a filter is selected from the fixed filter bank F(s, i) to filter the sample. Furthermore, C(s, i) decides how to apply the geometric transformation to the coefficients.

對於重建取樣R(x,y),經由使用重建取樣本身和相鄰取樣,視訊解碼器300可以應用多個濾波器組。給定一個濾波器組(其可以是固定濾波器組或用訊號發送的濾波器組),可以應用分類器。分類器決定可以應用來自濾波器組中的哪個濾波器以及如何轉置濾波器係數。在第一階段之後,對於每個濾波器組和相應的分類器,可以計算中間濾波訊號R’,例如,

Figure 02_image063
(12) For reconstructed samples R(x, y), video decoder 300 may apply multiple filter banks by using the reconstructed samples themselves and adjacent samples. Given a filter bank (which can be a fixed filter bank or a signaled filter bank), a classifier can be applied. The classifier decides which filter from the filter bank can be applied and how to transpose the filter coefficients. After the first stage, for each filter bank and corresponding classifier, an intermediate filtered signal R' can be calculated, e.g.,
Figure 02_image063
(12)

對於第i個濾波器,其中i = 0…

Figure 02_image065
Figure 02_image067
是第i個濾波器組中所選濾波器的第j個係數,Ni是係數的數量,f i,j,k其中k=0或1是一個相鄰取樣和當前取樣的函數,例如,f i,j,k可以被實現為VVC中的修剪函數
Figure 02_image069
(13) (
Figure 02_image071
是相鄰取樣相對於當前取樣的座標偏移量。 For the ith filter, where i = 0...
Figure 02_image065
,
Figure 02_image067
is the jth coefficient of the selected filter in the ith filter bank, Ni is the number of coefficients, f i,j,k where k = 0 or 1 is a function of the adjacent sample and the current sample, e.g., f i,j,k can be implemented as trim functions in VVC
Figure 02_image069
(13) (
Figure 02_image071
is the coordinate offset of adjacent samples relative to the current sample.

在一些實例中,固定濾波器或用訊號發送的濾波器的濾波器形狀可以是5x5、7x7、9x9、11x11和13x13。圖10A圖示濾波器510的實例,其是5×5菱形濾波器形狀,並且圖10B圖示濾波器520的實例,其是7x7菱形濾波器形狀。圖10C圖示濾波器530的實例,其是9x9菱形濾波器形狀,並且圖10D圖示濾波器540的實例,其是11x11菱形濾波器形狀。圖10E圖示濾波器550的實例,其是13x13菱形濾波器形狀。In some examples, the filter shapes of the fixed or signaled filters may be 5x5, 7x7, 9x9, 11x11, and 13x13. Figure 10A illustrates an example of filter 510, which is a 5x5 diamond filter shape, and Figure 10B illustrates an example of filter 520, which is a 7x7 diamond filter shape. Figure 10C illustrates an example of filter 530, which is a 9x9 diamond filter shape, and Figure 10D illustrates an example of filter 540, which is a 11x11 diamond filter shape. Figure 1OE illustrates an example of filter 550, which is a 13x13 diamond filter shape.

在一個實例中,視訊解碼器300可以被配置為基於2-D拉普拉斯運算元/梯度值來決定分類器C(f/s, i)、活動和方向值。分類器可以應用於每個取樣或塊。當分類器應用於塊時,塊中的所有取樣皆具有相同的類別索引和相同的轉置類型。例如, w i 可以表示塊的寬度, h i 可以表示塊的高度,並且(x, y)可以表示塊的左上角取樣的座標。 In one example, the video decoder 300 may be configured to decide the classifier C(f/s, i), activity and orientation values based on the 2-D Laplacian operator/gradient values. A classifier can be applied to each sample or block. When the classifier is applied to a block, all samples in the block have the same class index and the same transpose type. For example, wi may represent the width of the block, hi may represent the height of the block, and (x, y) may represent the coordinates of the upper-left corner sample of the block.

對於具有座標(k,l)的取樣,四個拉普拉斯(梯度)值:水平梯度 H、垂直梯度 V、135度梯度 Dl和45度梯度 D2可以被推導為

Figure 02_image017
(14) For a sample with coordinates (k,l), four Laplacian (gradient) values: horizontal gradient H , vertical gradient V , 135-degree gradient Dl and 45-degree gradient D2 can be derived as
Figure 02_image017
(14)

視訊解碼器300可以被配置為經由使用垂直梯度和水平梯度來推導出活動值 A i

Figure 02_image073
(15) 其中 a i b i 分別是用於分類器C(f/s, i)在水平方向和垂直方向上的訊窗大小。 The video decoder 300 may be configured to derive the activity value A i by using the vertical gradient and the horizontal gradient:
Figure 02_image073
(15) where a i and b i are the window sizes for the classifier C(f/s, i) in the horizontal and vertical directions, respectively.

視訊解碼器300可以被配置為將 A i 量化至0至

Figure 02_image075
的閉區間。量化值表示為 Â i Video decoder 300 may be configured to quantize A i to 0 to
Figure 02_image075
closed interval. The quantized value is denoted as  i .

視訊解碼器300可以被配置為使用水平梯度H、垂直梯度V、135度梯度D1和45度梯度D2來決定方向。The video decoder 300 may be configured to use the horizontal gradient H, vertical gradient V, 135 degree gradient D1 and 45 degree gradient D2 to determine the direction.

視訊解碼器300可以被配置為首先計算水平梯度

Figure 02_image077
、垂直梯度
Figure 02_image079
和兩個對角線梯度
Figure 02_image081
Figure 02_image083
的值,如下:
Figure 02_image085
(16) The video decoder 300 may be configured to first calculate the horizontal gradient
Figure 02_image077
, vertical gradient
Figure 02_image079
and two diagonal gradients
Figure 02_image081
and
Figure 02_image083
value, as follows:
Figure 02_image085
(16)

為了分配方向性 D i ,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為推導水平梯度和垂直梯度的最大值和最小值,該兩個對角線梯度的最大值和最小值如下:

Figure 02_image087
(17)
Figure 02_image089
(18) 隨後,可以與VVC同樣推導方向 D i ,其中方向的數量
Figure 02_image091
= 5: 步驟1. 若
Figure 02_image093
並且
Figure 02_image095
,則
Figure 02_image097
被設置為0(塊被歸類為「紋理」)。 步驟2. 若
Figure 02_image099
,則從步驟3繼續,否則從步驟4繼續。 步驟3. 若
Figure 02_image101
,則
Figure 02_image103
設置為2(塊被歸類為「強的水平/垂直」),否則
Figure 02_image103
設置為1(塊被歸類為「弱的水平/垂直」)。 步驟4. 若
Figure 02_image105
,則
Figure 02_image103
設置為4(塊被歸類為「強的對角」),否則
Figure 02_image097
被設置為3(塊被歸類為「弱的對角」)。 In order to assign the directionality D i , the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be configured to derive maximum and minimum values of the horizontal and vertical gradients as follows:
Figure 02_image087
(17)
Figure 02_image089
(18) Subsequently, the direction D i can be derived similarly to VVC, where the number of directions
Figure 02_image091
= 5: Step 1. If
Figure 02_image093
and
Figure 02_image095
,but
Figure 02_image097
is set to 0 (blocks are classified as "textures"). Step 2. If
Figure 02_image099
, then continue from step 3, otherwise continue from step 4. Step 3. If
Figure 02_image101
,but
Figure 02_image103
Set to 2 (blocks are classified as "strong horizontal/vertical"), otherwise
Figure 02_image103
Set to 1 (blocks are classified as "weak horizontal/vertical"). Step 4. If
Figure 02_image105
,but
Figure 02_image103
Set to 4 (blocks are classified as "strong diagonal"), otherwise
Figure 02_image097
is set to 3 (blocks are classified as "weak diagonal").

在一些實例中,可以支援更多的方向。In some instances, more directions may be supported.

視訊解碼器300可以被配置為經由將比率

Figure 02_image107
與閾值(Th)陣列進行比較來計算水平/垂直方向((ES i,HV))的邊緣強度。閾值陣列的大小用b S來表示,並且該閾值是按昇冪排列的。方向的數量是
Figure 02_image109
步驟1. 初始化 m = 0 並且 ES i,HV= 0; 步驟2. 若m等於S,則停止;否則,轉到步驟3。 步驟3. 若
Figure 02_image107
>Th[m], m = m+1 並且 ES i,HV= ES i,HV+ 1,進入步驟2;否則,停止。 The video decoder 300 can be configured to
Figure 02_image107
The edge intensities in the horizontal/vertical direction ((ES i,HV )) were calculated by comparing with the threshold (Th) array. The size of the threshold array is denoted by b S, and the thresholds are arranged in ascending powers. The number of directions is
Figure 02_image109
Step 1. Initialize m = 0 and ES i,HV = 0; Step 2. If m equals S, stop; otherwise, go to Step 3. Step 3. If
Figure 02_image107
>Th[m], m = m+1 and ES i, HV = ES i, HV + 1, go to step 2; otherwise, stop.

視訊解碼器300可以被配置為如下計算對角線方向(E i,D): 步驟1. 初始化 m = 0 並且 E i,D= 0; 步驟2. 若m等於S,則停止;否則,轉到步驟3。 步驟3.若

Figure 02_image111
>Th[m], m = m+1並且E i,D= E i,D+ 1,進入步驟2;否則,停止。 The video decoder 300 can be configured to calculate the diagonal direction (E i,D ) as follows: Step 1. Initialize m = 0 and E i,D = 0; Step 2. If m equals S, stop; otherwise, go to to step 3. Step 3. If
Figure 02_image111
>Th[m], m = m+1 and E i, D = E i, D + 1, go to step 2; otherwise, stop.

閾值陣列的一個實例是Th=[1.25, 1.5, 2, 3, 4.5, 8],並且S=6。An example of a threshold array is Th=[1.25, 1.5, 2, 3, 4.5, 8], and S=6.

視訊解碼器300可以被配置為如下決定主邊緣強度(ES M)和次邊緣強度(ES S): 若

Figure 02_image099
,S M被設置為ES HV,ES S被設置為ES D;否則,ES M被設置為ES D,並且ES S被設置為ES HV若ES S大於ES M,則D i被設置為0。否則,若
Figure 02_image113
ES M*(ES M+1)/2 + ES S;否則
Figure 02_image115
ES M*(ES M+1)/2 + ES S+
Figure 02_image117
2 The video decoder 300 may be configured to determine the primary edge strength (ES M ) and secondary edge strength ( ESS ) as follows: If
Figure 02_image099
, S M is set to ES HV , ESS is set to ES D ; otherwise, ES M is set to ES D , and ESS is set to ES HV If ES S is greater than ES M , Di is set to 0. Otherwise, if
Figure 02_image113
ES M *(ES M +1)/2 + ES S ; otherwise
Figure 02_image115
ES M *(ES M +1)/2+ES S +
Figure 02_image117
2

視訊解碼器300可以被配置為將類別索引C i推導為

Figure 02_image119
The video decoder 300 may be configured to derive the class index C i as
Figure 02_image119

基於 C i ,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為從濾波器組F(f/s, i)中選擇濾波器。 Based on C i , the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be configured to select filters from the filter bank F(f/s, i).

現在將更詳細地描述第二階段ALF 410的各態樣。在第二階段ALF 410,F’是濾波器組,C’是相應的分類器。可以用當前取樣及其鄰點對中間濾波結果進一步濾波。C’可以用於決定應用F’中的哪個濾波器以及如何轉置係數。在一個實例中,F’可以是用訊號發送的濾波器組或固定(預定義)濾波器組。在一個實例中,C’可以使用Rs及/或R’s經由以與第一階段相同的方式計算活動和方向來決定濾波器組F’的濾波器索引。當應用F’時,可以應用轉置。Various aspects of the second stage ALF 410 will now be described in more detail. In the second stage ALF 410, F' is the filter bank and C' is the corresponding classifier. The intermediate filter result can be further filtered with the current sample and its neighbors. C' can be used to decide which filter in F' to apply and how to transpose the coefficients. In one example, F' may be a signaled filter bank or a fixed (predefined) filter bank. In one example, C' may use Rs and/or R's to determine the filter index of filterbank F' by calculating activity and direction in the same manner as the first stage. Transpose can be applied when F' is applied.

固定濾波器組F(f,i)和對應的分類器C(f, i)可以從一或多個候選固定濾波器組中選擇。在一個實例中,給定i,可以有針對固定濾波器組F(f, i)和分類器C(f, i)的一些候選固定濾波器組。並且可以基於譯碼資訊(例如,圖片/CTU/CU/PU/TU大小、量化參數(QP)、非零量化係數的數量、運動向量、窗口大小(

Figure 02_image121
,
Figure 02_image011
)等)來選擇固定濾波器組F(f, i)和分類器C(f, i)。在一些實例中,對於每個F(f, i),可以用訊號發送語法元素以指示針對第i個固定濾波器組使用候選固定濾波器組中的哪個固定濾波器組。語法元素可以作為SPS、PPS、VPS、APS、圖片標頭(PH)、切片標頭(SH)、子圖片、CTU或塊的一部分用訊號進行發送。在一些實例中,所有這些語法元素可以具有相同的值並且只需要用訊號發送一個語法元素。在一些實例中,只有一個候選固定濾波器組可能可用於F(f, i),因此不需要用訊號發送語法元素。 The fixed filter bank F(f, i) and the corresponding classifier C(f, i) can be selected from one or more candidate fixed filter banks. In one example, given i, there may be some candidate fixed filter banks for fixed filter bank F(f, i) and classifier C(f, i). And can be based on coding information (eg, picture/CTU/CU/PU/TU size, quantization parameter (QP), number of non-zero quantization coefficients, motion vector, window size (
Figure 02_image121
,
Figure 02_image011
), etc.) to select a fixed filter bank F(f, i) and a classifier C(f, i). In some examples, for each F(f, i), a syntax element may be signaled to indicate which of the candidate fixed filter sets to use for the ith fixed filter set. Syntax elements may be signaled as part of SPS, PPS, VPS, APS, picture header (PH), slice header (SH), sub-picture, CTU or block. In some instances, all of these syntax elements may have the same value and only one syntax element needs to be signaled. In some examples, only one candidate fixed filter bank may be available for F(f, i), so no syntax element needs to be signaled.

在一個實例中,可以在高級別(例如SPS、VPS、APS、PH、SH、CTU或子塊級別)隱式地決定或顯式地用訊號發送 N s N f In one example, Ns and Nf may be implicitly determined or explicitly signaled at a high level (eg, SPS, VPS, APS, PH, SH, CTU, or sub-block level).

視訊解碼器300可以被配置為實施多個固定濾波器和一個用訊號發送的濾波器。在另一實例中,為了減少位元串流訊號傳遞管理負擔,同時保持自我調整,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為僅使用具有多個固定濾波器的一個用訊號發送的濾波器對當前取樣進行濾波,如圖11中所示。Video decoder 300 may be configured to implement multiple fixed filters and one signaled filter. In another example, in order to reduce the management burden of bitstream signaling while maintaining self-adjustment, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to use only one signaling with multiple fixed filters The filter filters the current sample, as shown in FIG. 11 .

圖11圖示根據本案內容的技術的用於用一個用訊號發送的濾波器實施多個固定濾波器的實例框架。在圖11的實例中,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300將第一階段ALF 540應用於重建塊的重建取樣R(x,y)。為了應用第一階段ALF 540,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300應用分類器(C)來決定用於重建取樣的第一類別索引,並且基於第一類別索引從第一組濾波器(F)中選擇濾波器(f)。視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300將來自第一組濾波器的濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一中間取樣值(R’)。如圖11中所示,在第一階段540中,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以使用多個分類器和多個濾波器來決定多個中間取樣值。11 illustrates an example framework for implementing multiple fixed filters with one signaled filter in accordance with the techniques of the present disclosure. In the example of FIG. 11, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 apply the first stage ALF 540 to the reconstructed samples R(x, y) of the reconstructed block. In order to apply the first stage ALF 540, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 apply a classifier (C) to decide a first class index for reconstructing samples, and based on the first class index from the first set of filters (F ) to select the filter (f). Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 apply filters from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine a first intermediate sample value (R'). As shown in FIG. 11, in the first stage 540, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may use multiple classifiers and multiple filters to determine multiple intermediate sample values.

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300將第二階段ALF 542應用於重建取樣。下文的等式(28)圖示視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以如何應用第二階段ALF的實例。Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 apply second stage ALF 542 to reconstructed samples. Equation (28) below illustrates an example of how video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may apply second-stage ALF.

N f 表示可以被應用於取樣的固定(預定義)濾波器組的數量。 Rs是對ALF的輸入。F(f, i),其中i = 0… N f -1表示第i個固定濾波器組。 C(f, i),其中i = 0… N f - 1表示具有第i個固定濾波器組的分類器。 經由C(f,i),對於每個取樣,計算濾波器索引。基於濾波器索引,從固定濾波器組F(f, i)中選擇濾波器來對該取樣進行濾波。此外,C(f, i)決定如何將幾何變換應用於係數。 N f represents the number of fixed (predefined) filter banks that can be applied to the samples. R s is the input to the ALF. F(f, i), where i = 0... N f -1 denotes the ith fixed filter bank. C(f, i), where i = 0... N f - 1 denotes the classifier with the ith fixed filter bank. Via C(f,i), for each sample, the filter index is calculated. Based on the filter index, a filter is selected from the fixed filter bank F(f, i) to filter the sample. Furthermore, C(f, i) decides how the geometric transformation is applied to the coefficients.

現在將描述第一階段。在第一階段中,對於重建取樣R(x, y),經由使用重建取樣本身和相鄰取樣,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為應用多個固定濾波器組。給定固定濾波器組F(f, i),視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以應用分類器C(f, i)。基於派生類別索引,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以應用來自濾波器組F(f, i)的濾波器。此外,幾何變換是在 C(f, i)中決定的,並且幾何變換可以應用於所選濾波器的係數。在第一階段之後,對於每個濾波器組和相應的分類器,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以計算經中間濾波的訊號R’,例如,如下:

Figure 02_image063
(19) The first stage will now be described. In the first stage, for reconstructed samples R(x, y), video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to apply multiple fixed filter banks by using the reconstructed samples themselves and adjacent samples. Given a fixed filter bank F(f, i), video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may apply a classifier C(f, i). Based on the derived class index, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may apply filters from filter bank F(f, i). Furthermore, the geometric transformation is decided in C(f, i), and the geometric transformation can be applied to the coefficients of the selected filter. After the first stage, for each filter bank and corresponding classifier, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may calculate the intermediate filtered signal R', eg, as follows:
Figure 02_image063
(19)

對於第i個濾波器,其中i = 0…

Figure 02_image123
時,
Figure 02_image067
是從第i個濾波器組F(f, i)中選取的濾波器的第j個係數,
Figure 02_image125
是係數的數量,並且
Figure 02_image127
其中 k = 0或1是一個相鄰取樣和當前取樣的函數,例如,
Figure 02_image127
可以被實施為如在VVC中的修剪函數
Figure 02_image069
(20)
Figure 02_image129
是相鄰取樣相對於當前取樣的座標偏移量,
Figure 02_image131
是從第i個濾波器組中選擇的濾波器的第j個修剪參數。 For the ith filter, where i = 0...
Figure 02_image123
hour,
Figure 02_image067
is the jth coefficient of the filter selected from the ith filter bank F(f, i),
Figure 02_image125
is the number of coefficients, and
Figure 02_image127
where k = 0 or 1 is a function of adjacent samples and the current sample, for example,
Figure 02_image127
can be implemented as a trim function as in VVC
Figure 02_image069
(20) (
Figure 02_image129
is the coordinate offset of adjacent samples relative to the current sample,
Figure 02_image131
is the jth trim parameter of the filter selected from the ith filter bank.

在一些實例中,固定濾波器或用訊號發送的濾波器的濾波器形狀可以是如圖9中所示的5x5、7x7、9x9、11x11和13x13。In some examples, the filter shapes of the fixed or signaled filters may be 5x5, 7x7, 9x9, 11x11 and 13x13 as shown in FIG. 9 .

在一個實例中,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以基於2-D拉普拉斯值,在分類器C(f, i)中決定活動和方向值。分類器可以應用於每個取樣或塊。當分類器應用於塊時,該塊中的所有取樣皆具有相同的類別索引和相同的轉置類型。例如, w i 可以表示塊的寬度, h i 可以表示塊的高度,並且(x, y)可以表示塊的左上角取樣的座標。 In one example, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may determine activity and orientation values in classifier C(f,i) based on 2-D Laplacian values. A classifier can be applied to each sample or block. When the classifier is applied to a block, all samples in the block have the same class index and the same transpose type. For example, wi may represent the width of the block, hi may represent the height of the block, and (x, y) may represent the coordinates of the upper-left corner sample of the block.

對於具有座標(k, l)的取樣,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為推導出四個拉普拉斯(梯度)值:水平梯度H、垂直梯度V、135度梯度D1和45度梯度D2,如下:

Figure 02_image017
(21) For samples with coordinates (k, l), video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to derive four Laplacian (gradient) values: horizontal gradient H, vertical gradient V, 135 degree gradient D1 and 45 degree gradient D2, as follows:
Figure 02_image017
(twenty one)

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以經由使用如下垂直梯度和水平梯度來推導活動值 A i

Figure 02_image073
(22) 其中 a i b i 分別是用於分類器C(f, i)的在水平和垂直方向上的訊窗大小。 The video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 can derive the activity value A i by using the vertical and horizontal gradients as follows:
Figure 02_image073
(22) where a i and b i are the window sizes in the horizontal and vertical directions for the classifier C(f, i), respectively.

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為將 A i 量化到0到 M A,i -1的閉區間,並且量化的值被表示為  i The video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be configured to quantize A i to a closed interval from 0 to M A,i -1, and the quantized value is denoted as  i .

在一個實例中,

Figure 02_image133
Q[193] = {0,  1,  2,  3,  4,  4,  5,  5,  6,  6,  6,  6,  7,  7,  7,  7,  8,  8,  8,  8,  8,  8,  8,  8,  9,  9,  9,  9,  9,  9,  9,  9, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 15}; 位元深度是R(x, y)的位元深度,
Figure 02_image135
可能取決於窗口大小( a i, b i ),並且
Figure 02_image135
可以等於以下值: a i b i mult i 0 0 5628 1 1 1407 2 2 624 3 3 351 4 4 225 5 5 156 In one instance,
Figure 02_image133
Q[193] = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 4, 5, 5, 6, 6, 6, 6, 7, 7, 7, 7, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 13, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 14, 15}; bit depth is R(x , y) the bit depth,
Figure 02_image135
may depend on the window size ( a i , b i ), and
Figure 02_image135
Can be equal to the following values: a i b i mult i 0 0 5628 1 1 1407 2 2 624 3 3 351 4 4 225 5 5 156

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為經由使用水平梯度 H、垂直梯度 V、135度梯度 D1和45度梯度 D2來決定方向。 The video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be configured to determine the direction by using the horizontal gradient H , the vertical gradient V , the 135-degree gradient D1 and the 45-degree gradient D2 .

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為首先計算水平梯度

Figure 02_image077
、垂直梯度
Figure 02_image079
和兩個對角線梯度
Figure 02_image081
Figure 02_image083
的值,如下:
Figure 02_image137
(23) The video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be configured to first calculate the horizontal gradient
Figure 02_image077
, vertical gradient
Figure 02_image079
and two diagonal gradients
Figure 02_image081
and
Figure 02_image083
value, as follows:
Figure 02_image137
(twenty three)

為了分配方向性 D i ,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為如下推導水平梯度和垂直梯度的最大值和最小值以及兩個對角線梯度的最大值和最小值:

Figure 02_image087
(24)
Figure 02_image089
(25) To assign the directivity D i , the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be configured to derive the maximum and minimum values of the horizontal and vertical gradients and the maximum and minimum values of the two diagonal gradients as follows:
Figure 02_image087
(twenty four)
Figure 02_image089
(25)

隨後,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為如下推導方向 D i ,並且方向的數量

Figure 02_image091
=5: 步驟1. 若
Figure 02_image093
並且
Figure 02_image095
Figure 02_image097
被設置為 0(塊被歸類為「紋理」)。 步驟2. 若
Figure 02_image099
,從步驟3繼續,否則從步驟4繼續。 步驟3. 若
Figure 02_image105
,則
Figure 02_image097
被設置為2(塊被歸類為「強的水平/垂直」),否則
Figure 02_image097
被設置為1(塊被歸類為「弱的水平/垂直」)。 步驟4. 若
Figure 02_image105
,則
Figure 02_image097
被設置為4(塊被歸類為「強的對角線」),否則
Figure 02_image097
被設置為3(塊被歸類為「弱的對角線」)。 Subsequently, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be configured to derive the direction D i , and the number of directions as follows
Figure 02_image091
=5: Step 1. If
Figure 02_image093
and
Figure 02_image095
,
Figure 02_image097
is set to 0 (blocks are classified as "textures"). Step 2. If
Figure 02_image099
, continue from step 3, otherwise continue from step 4. Step 3. If
Figure 02_image105
,but
Figure 02_image097
is set to 2 (blocks are classified as "strong horizontal/vertical"), otherwise
Figure 02_image097
is set to 1 (blocks are classified as "weak horizontal/vertical"). Step 4. If
Figure 02_image105
,but
Figure 02_image097
is set to 4 (blocks are classified as "strong diagonal"), otherwise
Figure 02_image097
is set to 3 (blocks are classified as "weak diagonal").

在一些實例中,可以支援更多方向。In some instances, more directions may be supported.

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為經由將比率

Figure 02_image107
與閾值(Th)陣列進行比較,來計算水平/垂直方向(ES i,HV)的邊緣強度。閾值陣列的大小可以是 S,並且閾值可以昇冪排列。方向的數量是
Figure 02_image109
步驟1.初始化m = 0 並且 ES i,HV= 0; 步驟2.若m等於 S,則停止;否則,轉到步驟3。 步驟3.若
Figure 02_image107
>Th[m], m = m+1並且ES i,HV= ES i,HV+ 1,進入步驟2;否則,停止。 The video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be configured to
Figure 02_image107
The edge intensities in the horizontal/vertical direction (ES i,HV ) are calculated by comparing with the threshold (Th) array. The size of the threshold array can be S , and the thresholds can be arranged in ascending powers. The number of directions is
Figure 02_image109
Step 1. Initialize m = 0 and ES i,HV = 0; Step 2. If m is equal to S, stop; otherwise, go to Step 3. Step 3. If
Figure 02_image107
>Th[m], m = m+1 and ES i,HV = ES i,HV + 1, go to step 2; otherwise, stop.

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為如下計算對角線方向(E i,D): 步驟1. 初始化m = 0並且E i,D= 0; 步驟2. 若m等於S,則停止;否則,轉到步驟3。 步驟3. 若

Figure 02_image111
>Th[m],m = m+1並且E i,D= E i,D+ 1,進入步驟2;否則,停止。 The video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be configured to calculate the diagonal direction (E i,D ) as follows: Step 1. Initialize m = 0 and E i,D = 0; Step 2. If m equals S, then stop; otherwise, go to step 3. Step 3. If
Figure 02_image111
>Th[m], m = m+1 and E i, D = E i, D + 1, go to step 2; otherwise, stop.

閾值陣列的實例是Th=[1.25, 1.5, 2, 3, 4.5, 8] 並且 S=6。An example of a threshold array is Th=[1.25, 1.5, 2, 3, 4.5, 8] and S=6.

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為如下決定主邊緣強度(ES M)和次邊緣強度(ES S): 若

Figure 02_image099
, ES M被設置為ES HV並且ES S被設置為ES D;否則,ES M被設置為ES D,ES S被設置為ES HV若ES S大於ES M,則D i被設置為0。否則,若
Figure 02_image113
ES M*(ES M+1)/2 + ES S;否則,
Figure 02_image115
ES M*(ES M+1)/2 + ES S+
Figure 02_image117
2 類別索引
Figure 02_image139
可以被推導為
Figure 02_image141
基於
Figure 02_image139
,從C(f, i)中挑選濾波器。 Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to determine primary edge strength (ES M ) and secondary edge strength ( ESS ) as follows: If
Figure 02_image099
, ES M is set to ES HV and ES S is set to ES D ; otherwise, ES M is set to ES D and ES S is set to ES HV . If ES S is greater than ES M , then Di is set to 0. Otherwise, if
Figure 02_image113
ES M *(ES M +1)/2 + ES S ; otherwise,
Figure 02_image115
ES M *(ES M +1)/2+ES S +
Figure 02_image117
2 Category Index
Figure 02_image139
can be deduced as
Figure 02_image141
based on
Figure 02_image139
, pick a filter from C(f, i).

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以從一或多個候選固定濾波器組中選擇固定濾波器組F(f,i)和對應的分類器C(f,i)。在一個實例中,給定i,可以有針對固定濾波器組F(f, i)和分類器C(f, i)的一些候選固定濾波器組。並且可以基於譯碼資訊,例如圖片/CTU/CU/PU/TU大小、QP、非零量化係數的數量、運動向量、訊窗大小( a i b i )等,來選擇固定濾波器組F(f,i)和分類器C(f, i)。在一些實例中,針對每個F(f, i),可以用訊號發送語法元素以指示使用針對第i個固定濾波器組的候選固定濾波器組中的哪個固定濾波器組。可以在SPS、PPS、VPS、APS、PH、SH、子圖片、CTU或塊級別用訊號發送語法元素。在一些實例中,所有這些語法元素可以具有相同的值並且只需要用訊號發送一個語法元素。在一些實例中,候選固定濾波器組可以僅具有一個固定濾波器組,因此不需要用訊號發送語法元素。 The video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may select a fixed filter bank F(f,i) and a corresponding classifier C(f,i) from one or more candidate fixed filter banks. In one example, given i, there may be some candidate fixed filter banks for fixed filter bank F(f, i) and classifier C(f, i). And the fixed filter bank F can be selected based on decoding information, such as picture/CTU/CU/PU/TU size, QP, number of non-zero quantization coefficients, motion vector, window size ( a i , b i ), etc. (f, i) and the classifier C(f, i). In some examples, for each F(f, i), a syntax element may be signaled to indicate which of the candidate fixed filter sets for the i-th fixed filter set to use. Syntax elements may be signaled at the SPS, PPS, VPS, APS, PH, SH, sub-picture, CTU or block level. In some instances, all of these syntax elements may have the same value and only one syntax element needs to be signaled. In some examples, a candidate fixed filter bank may have only one fixed filter bank, so no syntax element needs to be signaled.

在一個實例中,給定訊窗大小( a i b i ),所有可用的固定濾波器的數量是T。例如,QP可以表示當前取樣的量化參數,其中QP_MIN、QP_MAX和QP_OFFSET是預定義值。兩個候選固定濾波器組的索引可以被決定為

Figure 02_image143
可以用訊號發送語法元素以指示是將第 I 0個候選固定濾波器組還是第 I 1個候選固定濾波器組用於F(f, i)。在一些實例中,所有固定濾波器組可以共享相同的語法元素。 In one example, given the window size ( a i , b i ), the number of all available fixed filters is T. For example, QP may represent the quantization parameter of the current sample, where QP_MIN, QP_MAX, and QP_OFFSET are predefined values. The indices of the two candidate fixed filter banks can be determined as
Figure 02_image143
A syntax element may be signaled to indicate whether to use the 10th candidate fixed filter set or the 11th candidate fixed filter set for F ( f , i ). In some instances, all fixed filter banks may share the same syntax elements.

現在將描述第二階段的各態樣。在第二階段中,F’是用訊號發送的濾波器或預定義的濾波器組,並且C’是相應的分類器。中間濾波結果可以用當前取樣及/或其鄰點進行進一步濾波。C’可以用於決定應用F’中的哪個濾波器以及如何轉置係數。C’可以使用 Rs及/或 R's經由計算活動和方向來決定用於濾波器組F’的濾波器索引,作為第一階段。當應用F’時,可以應用轉置。 Various aspects of the second stage will now be described. In the second stage, F' is the signaled filter or predefined filter bank, and C' is the corresponding classifier. The intermediate filtering result may be further filtered with the current sample and/or its neighbors. C' can be used to decide which filter in F' to apply and how to transpose the coefficients. C' may use R s and/or R' s to determine filter indices for filter bank F' by computing activity and direction as a first stage. Transpose can be applied when F' is applied.

在一個實例中,對於具有座標(k, l)的取樣,四個拉普拉斯(梯度)值:水平梯度 H、垂直梯度 V、135度梯度 D1和45度梯度 D2可以被推導為

Figure 02_image017
(26) In one example, for a sample with coordinates (k, l), four Laplacian (gradient) values: horizontal gradient H , vertical gradient V , 135 degree gradient D1 and 45 degree gradient D2 can be derived as
Figure 02_image017
(26)

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為經由使用如下垂直梯度和水平梯度來推導活動值 A

Figure 02_image145
(27) 其中 ab分別是針對分類器C’在水平和垂直方向上的訊窗大小,並且 wh是其中所有取樣具有相同分類索引和相同轉置索引的塊的寬度和高度。 The video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be configured to derive the activity value A by using the vertical and horizontal gradients as follows:
Figure 02_image145
(27) where a and b are the window sizes in the horizontal and vertical directions for classifier C', respectively, and w and h are the width and height of the block where all samples have the same classification index and the same transpose index.

視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為對閉區間0到

Figure 02_image147
A進行量化,並且經量化的值被表示為
Figure 02_image149
。例如,
Figure 02_image151
Figure 02_image153
位元深度是R(x, y)的位元深度, mult可以取決於訊窗大小 a*b,mult可以等於以下值: a b mult 0 0 5628 1 1 1407 2 2 624 3 3 351 4 4 225 5 5 156 The video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 can be configured to
Figure 02_image147
A is quantized, and the quantized value is expressed as
Figure 02_image149
. E.g,
Figure 02_image151
Figure 02_image153
The bit depth is the bit depth of R(x, y), mult can depend on the window size a*b , mult can be equal to the following values: a b mult 0 0 5628 1 1 1407 2 2 624 3 3 351 4 4 225 5 5 156

可以經由美國專利公告2017/0238020A1、美國專利公告2017/0237981A1或美國專利公告2017/0237982A1中描述的方式來計算方向和如何執行轉置,所有這些美國專利公告經由引用的方式合併入本文。Orientation and how to perform the transpose may be calculated via the manner described in US Patent Publication 2017/0238020A1, US Patent Publication 2017/0237981A1, or US Patent Publication 2017/0237982A1, all of which are incorporated herein by reference.

現在將描述濾波的各態樣。在從C’獲得取樣的類別索引之後,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為基於類別索引,來從濾波器組F’中選擇濾波器。視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為將濾波器應用為:

Figure 02_image155
(28) 在(28)中,濾波被分為兩部分: 濾波部分1:
Figure 02_image157
:使用相鄰取樣進行濾波,可以應用幾何變換。 N 0是被應用的濾波器形狀的係數數量。濾波器可以是5x5、7x7、9x9、11x11或13x13菱形濾波器,如圖9中所示。 濾波部分2:
Figure 02_image159
:經由使用中間濾波取樣進行濾波,可以應用幾何變換。 N 0N 1表示潛在唯一係數的數量。 函數
Figure 02_image161
,其中j = 0或1,可以用修剪函式定義為   
Figure 02_image163
(29)
函數
Figure 02_image165
可以用修剪函式定義為
Figure 02_image167
(30)
b i 是係數c i相對應的修剪參數。 Various aspects of filtering will now be described. After obtaining the sampled class index from C', video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to select filters from filter bank F' based on the class index. Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to apply filters as:
Figure 02_image155
(28) In (28), the filtering is divided into two parts: Filtering part 1:
Figure 02_image157
: Filtering using adjacent samples, geometric transformations can be applied. N 0 is the number of coefficients of the filter shape being applied. The filter can be a 5x5, 7x7, 9x9, 11x11 or 13x13 diamond filter as shown in Figure 9. Filtering part 2:
Figure 02_image159
: A geometric transformation can be applied via filtering using intermediate filtered samples. N 0 and N 1 represent the number of potential unique coefficients. function
Figure 02_image161
, where j = 0 or 1, can be defined with the trim function as
Figure 02_image163
(29)
function
Figure 02_image165
can be defined with the trim function as
Figure 02_image167
(30)
b i is the trimming parameter corresponding to the coefficient c i .

圖12A-圖12E圖示兩部分濾波器的實例。圖12A圖示一個實例,其中濾波器部分1(濾波器560)是5x5, N 1=7,並且對於濾波器部分2(濾波器562), N 1=2。圖12B圖示一個實例,其中濾波器部分1(濾波器564)是7x7, N 0=13,並且對於濾波器部分2(濾波器566), N 1=2。圖12C圖示一個實例,其中濾波器部分1(濾波器568)是9x9, N 1=21,並且對於濾波器部分2(濾波器570), N 1=2。圖12D圖示一個實例,其中濾波器部分1(濾波器572)是11x11, N 1=31,並且對於濾波器部分2(濾波器574), N 1=2。圖12E圖示一個實例,其中濾波器部分1(濾波器576)是13x13, N 1=43,並且對於濾波器部分2(濾波器578), N 1=2。 12A-12E illustrate examples of two-part filters. FIG. 12A illustrates an example where filter section 1 (filter 560 ) is 5x5, N 1 =7, and for filter section 2 (filter 562 ), N 1 =2. Figure 12B illustrates an example where filter section 1 (filter 564) is 7x7, N 0 =13, and for filter section 2 (filter 566 ), N 1 =2. FIG. 12C illustrates an example where filter section 1 (filter 568 ) is 9x9, N 1 =21, and for filter section 2 (filter 570 ), N 1 =2. FIG. 12D illustrates an example where filter part 1 (filter 572 ) is 11×11, N 1 =31, and for filter part 2 (filter 574 ), N 1 =2. FIG. 12E illustrates an example where filter section 1 (filter 576 ) is 13x13, N 1 =43, and for filter section 2 (filter 578 ), N 1 =2.

在一些實例中,可以在SPS、VPS、PPS、APS、PH、SH、子圖片標頭或塊級別顯式地用訊號發送或隱式決定 N 0及/或 N 1的值。 In some examples, the values of N0 and/or N1 may be explicitly signaled or implicitly determined at the SPS, VPS, PPS, APS, PH, SH, sub - picture header, or block level.

在一些實例中,可以在SPS、VPS、PPS、APS、PH、SH、子圖片標頭、塊級別或濾波器級別顯式地用訊號發送或隱式地決定標誌,使得當該標誌等於一個值時,所有係數

Figure 02_image169
以及修剪參數
Figure 02_image171
沒有用訊號發送/使用,並且被推斷為0。 In some examples, a flag may be explicitly signaled or implicitly determined at the SPS, VPS, PPS, APS, PH, SH, sub-picture header, block level, or filter level such that when the flag equals a value , all coefficients
Figure 02_image169
and pruning parameters
Figure 02_image171
Not signaled/used and inferred to be 0.

在一些實例中,可以在SPS、VPS、PPS、APS、PH、SH、子圖片標頭、塊級別或濾波器級別顯式地用訊號發送或隱式地決定標誌,使得當該標誌等於一個值時,所有係數

Figure 02_image173
和修剪參數
Figure 02_image175
沒有被用訊號發送/使用,並且被推斷為 0。 In some examples, a flag may be explicitly signaled or implicitly determined at the SPS, VPS, PPS, APS, PH, SH, sub-picture header, block level, or filter level such that when the flag equals a value , all coefficients
Figure 02_image173
and trim parameters
Figure 02_image175
Not signaled/used and inferred to be 0.

在一組濾波器中, N 0的值可以隨著濾波器而不同。在一個濾波器組中, N 1的值可以隨著濾波器而不同。 Within a set of filters, the value of N 0 can vary from filter to filter. Within a filter bank, the value of N1 can vary from filter to filter.

本案內容認識到可以在 JVET-U0100 和美國臨時專利申請號 63/130,275中描述的技術之上提高ALF效能。當僅僅優選來自第一階段的經濾波取樣並且不需要在第二階段中進行濾波時,仍然用訊號發送F'的濾波器係數 c i (其為全零),其中 i=0… N 0- 2。然而,沒有必要用訊號發送所有這些零係數。因此,可以應用替代的訊號傳遞程序來提高譯碼效率。 The subject matter recognizes that ALF performance can be improved over the techniques described in JVET-U0100 and US Provisional Patent Application No. 63/130,275. When only filtered samples from the first stage are preferred and no filtering is required in the second stage, the filter coefficients ci (which are all zeros) of F' are still signaled, where i=0... N 0 - 2. However, it is not necessary to signal all these zero coefficients. Therefore, alternative signaling procedures can be applied to improve decoding efficiency.

在一些實例中,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為對位元串流中的表示一或多個濾波器F(f,i)的資料進行編碼,而非僅使用固定濾波器。補充地或替代地,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以被配置為決定是否執行如上面論述的第二階段濾波。當不執行第二階段時,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以避免譯碼(編碼及/或解碼)用於在第二階段期間應用的一或多個濾波器的係數,這可以減少位元串流中的訊號傳遞管理負擔以及由視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300兩者執行的處理。In some examples, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured to encode data in a bitstream representing one or more filters F(f,i), rather than using only fixed filtering device. Additionally or alternatively, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may be configured to decide whether to perform the second stage filtering as discussed above. When the second stage is not performed, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may avoid coding (encoding and/or decoding) the coefficients for one or more filters applied during the second stage, which may reduce The signaling management burden in the bitstream and the processing performed by both video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 .

圖13是示出根據本案內容的技術的實例ALF框架的概念圖。視訊解碼器300可以被配置為執行參照圖13描述的技術。如圖13中所示,實例ALF框架包括第一階段580和第二階段582兩者。根據本案內容的技術,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以使用濾波器使用資訊來決定是否要執行第二階段。當不執行第二階段時,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以繞過第二階段中的濾波(C',F'),如圖13中所示。因此,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以僅使用來自第一階段的中間濾波取樣(R’(x,y,0)…R’(x,y,Nf-1))來計算經濾波的取樣。13 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example ALF framework in accordance with techniques disclosed herein. Video decoder 300 may be configured to perform the techniques described with reference to FIG. 13 . As shown in FIG. 13 , the example ALF framework includes both a first stage 580 and a second stage 582 . According to the techniques of the present disclosure, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 can use the filter usage information to decide whether to perform the second stage. When the second stage is not performed, the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 can bypass the filtering (C', F') in the second stage, as shown in FIG. 13 . Therefore, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 can use only intermediate filtered samples from the first stage (R'(x,y,0)...R'(x,y,Nf-1)) to calculate filtered of sampling.

此外,視訊解碼器300可以例如根據以下公式來計算來自各種濾波器的中間濾波取樣的加權和:

Figure 02_image177
(21) 其中
Figure 02_image179
Figure 02_image181
的權重。 Additionally, video decoder 300 may calculate a weighted sum of intermediate filtered samples from various filters, for example, according to the following formula:
Figure 02_image177
(21) of which
Figure 02_image179
Yes
Figure 02_image181
the weight of.

在一些實例中,可以按照序列、圖片、切片、子圖片、CTU、CTB或子塊級別,用訊號發送濾波器使用資訊。例如,視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以在以下各項中的一項或多項中對濾波器使用資訊進行編碼:序列參數集(SPS)、圖片參數集(PPS)、切片標頭、子圖片標頭、譯碼樹單元(CTU)標頭、譯碼樹塊(CTB)標頭、或者子塊標頭。In some examples, filter usage information may be signaled at the sequence, picture, slice, subpicture, CTU, CTB, or subblock level. For example, video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may encode filter usage information in one or more of the following: sequence parameter set (SPS), picture parameter set (PPS), slice header, Sub-picture header, coding tree unit (CTU) header, coding tree block (CTB) header, or sub-block header.

在另一個實例中,可以不用訊號發送濾波器使用資訊。而是,視訊解碼器300可以基於譯碼資訊,例如量化參數(QP)、塊大小、訊框間/訊框內模式或其他此類資料,自我調整地推導濾波器使用資訊。In another example, the filter usage information may not be signaled. Rather, video decoder 300 may self-adjustably derive filter usage information based on coding information, such as quantization parameters (QPs), block sizes, inter/intra-frame modes, or other such data.

給定濾波器使用資訊的值,權重

Figure 02_image179
(其中 i= 0… N f - 1)可以是固定的,或者視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以在序列、圖片、切片、子-圖片、CTU、CTB、子塊級對位元串流中的權重 w i 的值進行編碼。可以使用權重 w i 的若干個組合,可以使用濾波器使用資訊來決定權重 w i 的哪個組合被用於當前取樣。 The value of the given filter usage information, the weight
Figure 02_image179
(where i = 0... N f - 1) may be fixed, or video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may align bit strings at sequence, picture, slice, sub-picture, CTU, CTB, sub-block level The value of the weight w i in the stream is encoded. Several combinations of weights wi can be used, and filter usage information can be used to decide which combination of weights wi is used for the current sample.

在一個實例中,可以用訊號發送第一標誌。當該第一標誌等於1時,則視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以繞過值(C',F')。隨後,可以用訊號發送第二標誌。視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以將第二標誌的值與權重 w i (其中 i= 0… N f - 1)的組合相關聯。例如,若第二標誌等於 ii可以是0… N f - 1,則R'(x,y,i)可以用作經濾波取樣。 In one example, the first flag can be signaled. When the first flag is equal to 1, then the video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 can bypass the value (C', F'). Subsequently, the second flag can be signaled. Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may associate the value of the second flag with a combination of weights w i (where i = 0 . . . N f − 1 ). For example, if the second flag is equal to i , i may be 0... N f - 1, then R'(x, y, i) may be used as filtered samples.

圖14是示出根據本案內容的技術的另一實例ALF框架的概念圖。視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以根據參照圖14描述的技術而被配置。特別是,在圖14中,縮放被應用於濾波結果以獲得經濾波取樣。14 is a conceptual diagram illustrating another example ALF framework in accordance with techniques within the context of this disclosure. Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may be configured according to the techniques described with reference to FIG. 14 . In particular, in Figure 14, scaling is applied to the filtered results to obtain filtered samples.

圖14示出用於使用多個固定濾波器組和多個用訊號發送的濾波器組來對視訊資料的重建取樣進行濾波的實例框架。視訊解碼器300可以被配置為根據圖14的技術來實施多個固定濾波器和多個用訊號發送的濾波器。在圖14的實例中,視訊解碼器300將第一階段ALF 584應用於重建取樣R(x,y)以決定中間濾波訊號R’。隨後,視訊解碼器300將第二ALF階段586應用於R’以決定濾波取樣588的值。14 illustrates an example framework for filtering reconstructed samples of video data using multiple fixed filter banks and multiple signaled filter banks. Video decoder 300 may be configured to implement multiple fixed filters and multiple signaled filters in accordance with the techniques of FIG. 14 . In the example of Figure 14, the video decoder 300 applies the first stage ALF 584 to the reconstructed samples R(x,y) to determine the intermediate filtered signal R'. Subsequently, the video decoder 300 applies the second ALF stage 586 to R&apos; to determine the value of the filtered samples 588.

圖15是示出可以執行本案內容的技術的示例性視訊轉碼器200的方塊圖。圖15是出於解釋的目的而提供的,並且不應當被認為對在本案內容中泛泛地舉例說明和描述的技術進行限制。出於解釋的目的,根據VVC(正在開發的ITU-T H.266)和HEVC(ITU-T H.265)的技術,本案內容描述了視訊轉碼器200。然而,本案內容的技術可以由被配置為其他視訊譯碼標準的視訊編碼設備來執行。FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary video transcoder 200 that may perform the techniques disclosed herein. Figure 15 is provided for purposes of explanation and should not be considered limiting of the techniques broadly illustrated and described in the context of this case. For explanatory purposes, the video transcoder 200 is described in accordance with the techniques of VVC (ITU-T H.266 under development) and HEVC (ITU-T H.265). However, the techniques of the present disclosure may be performed by video encoding devices configured to other video coding standards.

在圖15的實例中,視訊轉碼器200包括視訊資料記憶體230、模式選擇單元202、殘差產生單元204、變換處理單元206、量化單元208、逆量化單元210、逆變換處理單元212、重建單元214、濾波器單元216、DPB 218和熵編碼單元220。視訊資料記憶體230、模式選擇單元202、殘差產生單元204、變換處理單元206、量化單元208、逆量化單元210、逆變換處理單元212、重建單元214、濾波器單元216、DPB 218和熵編碼單元220中的任何一者或全部可以在一或多個處理器中或者在處理電路中實現。例如,視訊轉碼器200的單元可以被實現為一或多個電路或邏輯部件,作為硬體電路的一部分,或者作為處理器、ASIC或FPGA的一部分。此外,視訊轉碼器200可以包括額外或替代的處理器或處理電路以執行這些和其他功能。In the example of FIG. 15 , the video transcoder 200 includes a video data memory 230, a mode selection unit 202, a residual generation unit 204, a transform processing unit 206, a quantization unit 208, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform processing unit 212, Reconstruction unit 214 , filter unit 216 , DPB 218 , and entropy encoding unit 220 . Video data memory 230, mode selection unit 202, residual generation unit 204, transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, inverse transform processing unit 212, reconstruction unit 214, filter unit 216, DPB 218, and entropy Any or all of encoding units 220 may be implemented in one or more processors or in processing circuits. For example, the elements of video transcoder 200 may be implemented as one or more circuits or logic components, as part of a hardware circuit, or as part of a processor, ASIC or FPGA. Furthermore, video transcoder 200 may include additional or alternative processors or processing circuits to perform these and other functions.

視訊資料記憶體230可以儲存要由視訊轉碼器200的部件來編碼的視訊資料。視訊轉碼器200可以從例如視訊源104(圖1)接收被儲存在視訊資料記憶體230中的視訊資料。DPB 218可以充當參考圖片記憶體,其儲存參考視訊資料以在由視訊轉碼器200對後續視訊資料進行預測時使用。視訊資料記憶體230和DPB 218可以由各種記憶體設備中的任何一種形成,諸如動態隨機存取記憶體(DRAM)(包括同步DRAM(SDRAM))、磁阻RAM(MRAM)、電阻性RAM(RRAM)、或其他類型的記憶體設備。視訊資料記憶體230和DPB 218可以由相同的記憶體設備或單獨的記憶體設備來提供。在各個實例中,視訊資料記憶體230可以與視訊轉碼器200的其他部件在晶片上(如圖所示),或者相對於那些部件在晶片外。Video data memory 230 may store video data to be encoded by components of video transcoder 200 . Video transcoder 200 may receive video data stored in video data memory 230 from, for example, video source 104 (FIG. 1). DPB 218 may act as a reference picture memory that stores reference video data for use in prediction of subsequent video data by video transcoder 200 . Video data memory 230 and DPB 218 may be formed from any of a variety of memory devices, such as dynamic random access memory (DRAM) (including synchronous DRAM (SDRAM)), magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), resistive RAM ( RRAM), or other types of memory devices. Video data memory 230 and DPB 218 may be provided by the same memory device or by separate memory devices. In various examples, video data memory 230 may be on-chip with other components of video transcoder 200 (as shown), or off-chip relative to those components.

在本案內容中,對視訊資料記憶體230的引用不應當被解釋為限於在視訊轉碼器200內部的記憶體(除非如此具體地描述),或者不限於在視訊轉碼器200外部的記憶體(除非如此具體地描述)。確切而言,對視訊資料記憶體230的引用應當被理解為儲存視訊轉碼器200接收以用於編碼的視訊資料(例如,用於要被編碼的當前塊的視訊資料)的參考記憶體。圖1的記憶體106亦可以提供對來自視訊轉碼器200的各個單元的輸出的臨時儲存。In the context of this case, references to video data memory 230 should not be construed as limited to memory internal to video transcoder 200 (unless so specifically described), or to memory external to video transcoder 200 (unless so specifically described). Rather, references to video data memory 230 should be understood as reference memory that stores video data received by video transcoder 200 for encoding (eg, video data for the current block to be encoded). The memory 106 of FIG. 1 may also provide temporary storage of outputs from the various units of the video transcoder 200 .

圖示圖15的各個單元以説明理解由視訊轉碼器200執行的操作。這些單元可以被實現為固定功能電路、可程式設計電路、或其組合。固定功能電路代表提供特定功能並且關於可以執行的操作而預先設置的電路。可程式設計電路代表能夠被程式設計以執行各種任務,並且以能夠執行的操作來提供靈活功能的電路。例如,可程式設計電路可以執行軟體或韌體,軟體或韌體使得可程式設計電路以軟體或韌體的指令所定義的方式進行操作。固定功能電路可以執行軟體指令(例如,以接收參數或輸出參數),但是固定功能電路執行的操作類型通常是不可變的。在一些實例中,該等單元中的一或多個單元可以是不同的電路塊(固定功能或可程式設計),並且在一些實例中,該等單元中的一或多個單元可以是積體電路。The various elements of FIG. 15 are illustrated to illustrate understanding of the operations performed by the video transcoder 200 . These units may be implemented as fixed function circuits, programmable circuits, or a combination thereof. Fixed-function circuits represent circuits that provide specific functions and are preset with respect to operations that can be performed. Programmable circuits represent circuits that can be programmed to perform various tasks, and that provide flexible functionality in the operations that can be performed. For example, the programmable circuit may execute software or firmware that causes the programmable circuit to operate in a manner defined by the instructions of the software or firmware. Fixed-function circuits can execute software instructions (eg, to receive parameters or output parameters), but the types of operations performed by fixed-function circuits are generally immutable. In some instances, one or more of the units may be distinct circuit blocks (fixed function or programmable), and in some instances, one or more of the units may be integrated circuit.

視訊轉碼器200可以包括由可程式設計電路形成的算數邏輯單位(ALU)、基本功能單元(EFU)、數位電路、類比電路及/或可程式設計核。在其中使用由可程式設計電路執行的軟體來執行視訊轉碼器200的操作的實例中,記憶體106(圖1)可以儲存視訊轉碼器200接收並且執行的軟體的指令(例如,目標代碼),或者視訊轉碼器200內的另一記憶體(未圖示)可以儲存此類指令。The video transcoder 200 may include an arithmetic logic unit (ALU), an elementary functional unit (EFU), a digital circuit, an analog circuit, and/or a programmable core formed of programmable circuits. In examples in which the operations of video transcoder 200 are performed using software executed by programmable circuitry, memory 106 (FIG. 1) may store instructions (eg, object code) for the software received and executed by video transcoder 200 ), or another memory (not shown) in the video transcoder 200 can store such instructions.

視訊資料記憶體230被配置為儲存所接收的視訊資料。視訊轉碼器200可以從視訊資料記憶體230取回視訊資料的圖片,並且將視訊資料提供給殘差產生單元204和模式選擇單元202。視訊資料記憶體230中的視訊資料可以是要被編碼的原始視訊資料。The video data memory 230 is configured to store the received video data. The video transcoder 200 can retrieve the pictures of the video data from the video data memory 230 and provide the video data to the residual generation unit 204 and the mode selection unit 202 . The video data in the video data memory 230 may be the original video data to be encoded.

模式選擇單元202包括運動估計單元222、運動補償單元224和訊框內預測單元226。模式選擇單元202可以包括額外功能單元,其根據其他預測模式來執行視訊預測。作為實例,模式選擇單元202可以包括調色板單元、塊內複製單元(其可以是運動估計單元222及/或運動補償單元224的一部分)、仿射單元、線性模型(LM)單元等。Mode selection unit 202 includes motion estimation unit 222 , motion compensation unit 224 and intra-frame prediction unit 226 . Mode selection unit 202 may include additional functional units that perform video prediction according to other prediction modes. As examples, mode selection unit 202 may include a palette unit, an intra-block copy unit (which may be part of motion estimation unit 222 and/or motion compensation unit 224), an affine unit, a linear model (LM) unit, and the like.

模式選擇單元202通常協調多個編碼通路(pass),以測試編碼參數的組合以及針對此類組合所得到的率失真值。編碼參數可以包括將CTU分割為CU、用於CU的預測模式、用於CU的殘差資料的變換類型、用於CU的殘差資料的量化參數等。模式選擇單元202可以最終選擇編碼參數的具有比其他測試的組合更佳的率失真值的組合。Mode selection unit 202 typically coordinates multiple encoding passes to test combinations of encoding parameters and resulting rate-distortion values for such combinations. Coding parameters may include partitioning of the CTU into CUs, prediction mode for the CU, transform type for the residual data of the CU, quantization parameters for the residual data of the CU, and the like. The mode selection unit 202 may finally select a combination of encoding parameters that has a better rate-distortion value than the other tested combinations.

視訊轉碼器200可以將從視訊資料記憶體230取回的圖片分割為一系列CTU,並且將一或多個CTU封裝在切片內。模式選擇單元202可以根據樹結構(諸如上述HEVC的QTBT結構或四叉樹結構)來分割圖片的CTU。如前述,視訊轉碼器200可以經由根據樹結構來分割CTU,從而形成一或多個CU。此類CU通常亦可以被稱為「視訊塊」或「塊」。The video transcoder 200 may partition the pictures retrieved from the video data memory 230 into a series of CTUs, and encapsulate one or more CTUs in slices. The mode selection unit 202 may divide the CTUs of the picture according to a tree structure such as the above-described QTBT structure or quad-tree structure of HEVC. As described above, the video transcoder 200 may form one or more CUs by dividing the CTUs according to the tree structure. Such CUs may also often be referred to as "video blocks" or "blocks."

通常,模式選擇單元202亦控制其部件(例如,運動估計單元222、運動補償單元224和訊框內預測單元226)以產生用於當前塊(例如,當前CU,或者在HEVC中為PU和TU的重疊部分)的預測塊。為了對當前塊進行訊框間預測,運動估計單元222可以執行運動搜尋以辨識在一或多個參考圖片(例如,被儲存在DPB 218中的一或多個先前譯碼的圖片)中的一或多個緊密匹配的參考塊。具體地,運動估計單元222可以例如根據絕對差之和(SAD)、平方差之和(SSD)、平均絕對差(MAD)、均方差(MSD)等,來計算表示潛在參考塊將與當前塊的類似程度的值。運動估計單元222通常可以使用在當前塊與所考慮的參考塊之間的逐個取樣差來執行這些計算。運動估計單元222可以辨識從這些計算所得到的具有最低值的參考塊,其指示與當前塊最緊密匹配的參考塊。Typically, mode selection unit 202 also controls its components (eg, motion estimation unit 222, motion compensation unit 224, and intra-frame prediction unit 226) to generate a overlapping part) of the prediction block. To perform inter-frame prediction on the current block, motion estimation unit 222 may perform a motion search to identify a motion in one or more reference pictures (eg, one or more previously coded pictures stored in DPB 218). or multiple closely matched reference blocks. Specifically, the motion estimation unit 222 may, for example, based on sum of absolute differences (SAD), sum of squared differences (SSD), mean absolute differences (MAD), mean square deviations (MSD), etc., to value of similar degree. Motion estimation unit 222 may typically perform these calculations using sample-by-sample differences between the current block and the reference block under consideration. Motion estimation unit 222 may identify the reference block with the lowest value resulting from these calculations, which indicates the reference block that most closely matches the current block.

運動估計單元222可以形成一或多個運動向量(MV),該運動向量限定相對於當前塊在當前圖片中的位置而言參考塊在參考圖片中的的位置。隨後,運動估計單元222可以將運動向量提供給運動補償單元224。例如,對於單向訊框間預測,運動估計單元222可以提供單個運動向量,而對於雙向訊框間預測,運動估計單元222可以提供兩個運動向量。隨後,運動補償單元224可以使用運動向量來產生預測塊。例如,運動補償單元224可以使用運動向量來取回參考塊的資料。作為另一實例,若運動向量具有分數取樣精度,則運動補償單元224可以根據一或多個內插濾波器來對用於預測塊的值進行內插。此外,對於雙向訊框間預測,運動補償單元224可以取回用於由相應的運動向量標識的兩個參考塊的資料並且例如經由逐個取樣平均或加權平均來將所取回的資料進行組合。Motion estimation unit 222 may form one or more motion vectors (MVs) that define the position of the reference block in the reference picture relative to the position of the current block in the current picture. Motion estimation unit 222 may then provide the motion vector to motion compensation unit 224 . For example, for uni-directional inter-frame prediction, motion estimation unit 222 may provide a single motion vector, while for bi-directional inter-frame prediction, motion estimation unit 222 may provide two motion vectors. Subsequently, motion compensation unit 224 may use the motion vector to generate a prediction block. For example, motion compensation unit 224 may use motion vectors to retrieve information for reference blocks. As another example, if the motion vector has fractional sampling precision, motion compensation unit 224 may interpolate the values used for the prediction block according to one or more interpolation filters. Furthermore, for bi-directional inter-frame prediction, motion compensation unit 224 may retrieve data for the two reference blocks identified by corresponding motion vectors and combine the retrieved data, eg, via sample-by-sample averaging or weighted averaging.

作為另一實例,對於訊框內預測或訊框內預測譯碼,訊框內預測單元226可以根據與當前塊相鄰的取樣來產生預測塊。例如,對於方向性模式,訊框內預測單元226通常可以在數學上將相鄰取樣的值進行組合,並且跨當前塊在所定義的方向上填充這些計算出的值以產生預測塊。作為另一實例,對於DC模式,訊框內預測單元226可以計算當前塊的相鄰取樣的平均值,並且產生預測塊以包括針對預測塊的每個取樣的該得到的平均值。As another example, for intra-frame prediction or intra-frame prediction coding, intra-frame prediction unit 226 may generate a prediction block from samples adjacent to the current block. For example, for directional mode, intra-frame prediction unit 226 may typically mathematically combine the values of adjacent samples and fill in these computed values in the defined direction across the current block to produce a predicted block. As another example, for DC mode, intra-frame prediction unit 226 may calculate an average of adjacent samples of the current block and generate a prediction block to include this resulting average for each sample of the prediction block.

模式選擇單元202將預測塊提供給殘差產生單元204。殘差產生單元204從視訊資料記憶體230接收當前塊的原始的未經編碼的版本,並且從模式選擇單元202接收預測塊。殘差產生單元204計算在當前塊與預測塊之間的逐個取樣差。所得到的逐個取樣差定義了用於當前塊的殘差塊。在一些實例中,殘差產生單元204可以殘差塊中的取樣值之間的差,以使用殘差差分脈衝解碼調制(RDPCM)來產生殘差塊。在一些實例中,可以使用執行二進位減法的一或多個減法器電路來形成殘差產生單元204。The mode selection unit 202 provides the prediction block to the residual generation unit 204 . Residual generation unit 204 receives the original unencoded version of the current block from video data memory 230 and receives the prediction block from mode selection unit 202 . The residual generation unit 204 calculates a sample-by-sample difference between the current block and the prediction block. The resulting sample-by-sample differences define the residual block for the current block. In some examples, residual generation unit 204 may use differences between sample values in the residual block to generate the residual block using residual differential pulse decoding modulation (RDPCM). In some examples, residual generation unit 204 may be formed using one or more subtractor circuits that perform binary subtraction.

在其中模式選擇單元202將CU分割為PU的實例中,每個PU可以與亮度預測單元和對應的色度預測單元相關聯。視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以支援具有各種大小的PU。如上所指出的,CU的大小可以代表CU的亮度譯碼塊的大小,而PU的大小可以代表PU的亮度預測單元的大小。假定特定CU的大小為2Nx2N,則視訊轉碼器200可以支援用於訊框內預測的2Nx2N或NxN的PU大小、以及用於訊框間預測的2Nx2N、2NxN、Nx2N、NxN或類似的對稱的PU大小。視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300亦可以支援針對用於訊框間預測的2NxnU、2NxnD、nLx2N和nRx2N的PU大小的非對稱分割。In examples in which mode selection unit 202 partitions the CU into PUs, each PU may be associated with a luma prediction unit and a corresponding chroma prediction unit. Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may support PUs with various sizes. As noted above, the size of the CU may represent the size of the CU's luma coding block, while the size of the PU may represent the size of the PU's luma prediction unit. Assuming the size of a particular CU is 2Nx2N, video transcoder 200 may support PU sizes of 2Nx2N or NxN for intra-frame prediction, and 2Nx2N, 2NxN, Nx2N, NxN or similar symmetric for inter-frame prediction PU size. Video transcoder 200 and video decoder 300 may also support asymmetric partitioning for PU sizes of 2NxnU, 2NxnD, nLx2N, and nRx2N for inter-frame prediction.

在其中模式選擇單元不將CU進一步分割為PU的實例中,每個CU可以與亮度譯碼塊和對應的色度譯碼塊相關聯。如前述,CU的大小可以代表CU的亮度譯碼塊的大小。視訊轉碼器200和視訊解碼器300可以支援2Nx2N、2NxN或Nx2N的CU大小。In examples where the mode selection unit does not further partition the CU into PUs, each CU may be associated with a luma coding block and a corresponding chroma coding block. As previously described, the size of the CU may represent the size of the luma coding block of the CU. The video transcoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may support a CU size of 2Nx2N, 2NxN or Nx2N.

對於其他視訊譯碼技術(舉一些實例,諸如塊內複製模式譯碼、仿射模式譯碼和線性模型(LM)模式譯碼),模式選擇單元202經由與譯碼技術相關聯的相應單元來產生用於正被編碼的當前塊的預測塊。在一些實例中(諸如調色板模式譯碼),模式選擇單元202可以不產生預測塊,而是替代地產生指示基於所選擇的調色板來重建塊的方式的語法元素。在此類模式下,模式選擇單元202可以將這些語法元素提供給熵編碼單元220以進行編碼。For other video coding techniques (such as intra-block copy mode coding, affine mode coding, and linear model (LM) mode coding, to name a few examples), mode selection unit 202 selects via corresponding units associated with the coding technique A prediction block is generated for the current block being encoded. In some examples (such as palette mode coding), mode selection unit 202 may not generate prediction blocks, but instead generate syntax elements that indicate how the blocks are to be reconstructed based on the selected palette. In such modes, mode selection unit 202 may provide these syntax elements to entropy encoding unit 220 for encoding.

如前述,殘差產生單元204接收用於當前塊和對應的預測塊的視訊資料。隨後,殘差產生單元204為當前塊產生殘差塊。為了產生殘差塊,殘差產生單元204計算在預測塊與當前塊之間的逐個取樣差。As previously described, the residual generation unit 204 receives video data for the current block and the corresponding prediction block. Subsequently, the residual generating unit 204 generates a residual block for the current block. To generate a residual block, the residual generation unit 204 calculates a sample-by-sample difference between the prediction block and the current block.

變換處理單元206將一或多個變換應用於殘差塊,以產生變換係數的塊(本文中被稱為「變換係數塊」)。變換處理單元206可以將各種變換應用於殘差塊,以形成變換係數塊。例如,變換處理單元206可以將離散餘弦變換(DCT)、方向變換、Karhunen-Loeve變換(KLT)、或概念上類似的變換應用於殘差塊。在一些實例中,變換處理單元206可以對殘差塊執行多種變換,例如,主變換和二次變換(諸如,旋轉變換)。在一些實例中,變換處理單元206不對殘差塊應用變換。Transform processing unit 206 applies one or more transforms to the residual block to generate a block of transform coefficients (referred to herein as a "transform coefficient block"). Transform processing unit 206 may apply various transforms to the residual block to form a block of transform coefficients. For example, transform processing unit 206 may apply a discrete cosine transform (DCT), a directional transform, a Karhunen-Loeve transform (KLT), or a conceptually similar transform to the residual block. In some examples, transform processing unit 206 may perform various transforms, eg, primary transforms and secondary transforms (such as rotational transforms), on the residual block. In some examples, transform processing unit 206 does not apply a transform to the residual block.

量化單元208可以對變換係數塊中的變換係數進行量化,以產生經量化的變換係數塊。量化單元208可以根據與當前塊相關聯的QP值來對變換係數塊的變換係數進行量化。視訊轉碼器200(例如,經由模式選擇單元202)可以經由調整與CU相關聯的QP值來調整被應用於與當前塊相關聯的變換係數塊的量化程度。量化可能引起資訊損失,並且因此,經量化的變換係數可能具有與變換處理單元206所產生的原始變換係數相比更低的精度。Quantization unit 208 may quantize the transform coefficients in the transform coefficient block to produce a quantized transform coefficient block. Quantization unit 208 may quantize the transform coefficients of the transform coefficient block according to the QP value associated with the current block. Video transcoder 200 (eg, via mode selection unit 202 ) may adjust the degree of quantization applied to the transform coefficient block associated with the current block by adjusting the QP value associated with the CU. Quantization may cause a loss of information, and thus, the quantized transform coefficients may have lower precision than the original transform coefficients produced by transform processing unit 206 .

逆量化單元210和逆變換處理單元212可以將逆量化和逆變換分別應用於經量化的變換係數塊,以從變換係數塊重建殘差塊。重建單元214可以基於經重建的殘差塊和由模式選擇單元202產生的預測塊來產生與當前塊相對應的重建塊(儘管潛在地具有某種程度的失真)。例如,重建單元214可以將經重建的殘差塊的取樣與來自模式選擇單元202所產生的預測塊的對應取樣相加,以產生重建塊。Inverse quantization unit 210 and inverse transform processing unit 212 may apply inverse quantization and inverse transform, respectively, to the quantized transform coefficient block to reconstruct a residual block from the transform coefficient block. Reconstruction unit 214 may generate a reconstructed block corresponding to the current block (albeit potentially with some degree of distortion) based on the reconstructed residual block and the prediction block produced by mode selection unit 202 . For example, reconstruction unit 214 may add samples of the reconstructed residual block to corresponding samples from the prediction block generated by mode selection unit 202 to generate a reconstructed block.

濾波器單元216可以對經重建的塊執行一或多個濾波器操作。例如,濾波器單元216可以執行去塊操作以減少沿著CU的邊緣的塊效應偽影。在一些實例中,可以跳過濾波單元216的操作。Filter unit 216 may perform one or more filter operations on the reconstructed block. For example, filter unit 216 may perform deblocking operations to reduce blocking artifacts along edges of the CU. In some examples, the operations of filtering unit 216 may be skipped.

視訊轉碼器200將經重建的塊儲存在DPB 218中。例如,在其中不執行濾波器單元216的操作的實例中,重建單元214可以將經重建的塊儲存到DPB 218中。在其中執行濾波器單元216的操作的實例中,濾波器單元216可以將經濾波的重建塊儲存到DPB 218中。運動估計單元222和運動補償單元224可以從DPB 218取回由經重建的(並且潛在地經濾波的)塊形成的參考圖片,以對後續編碼的圖片的塊進行訊框間預測。另外,訊框內預測單元226可以使用在DPB 218中的當前圖片的經重建的塊來對當前圖片中的其他塊進行訊框內預測。Video transcoder 200 stores the reconstructed blocks in DPB 218 . For example, in instances in which the operations of filter unit 216 are not performed, reconstruction unit 214 may store the reconstructed block into DPB 218 . In examples in which the operations of filter unit 216 are performed, filter unit 216 may store the filtered reconstructed block into DPB 218 . Motion estimation unit 222 and motion compensation unit 224 may retrieve reference pictures formed from reconstructed (and potentially filtered) blocks from DPB 218 for inter-frame prediction of blocks of subsequently encoded pictures. Additionally, intra-prediction unit 226 may use the reconstructed blocks of the current picture in DPB 218 to intra-predict other blocks in the current picture.

通常,熵編碼單元220可以對從視訊轉碼器200的其他功能部件接收的語法元素進行熵編碼。例如,熵編碼單元220可以對來自量化單元208的經量化的變換係數塊進行熵編碼。作為另一實例,熵編碼單元220可以對來自模式選擇單元202的預測語法元素(例如,用於訊框間預測的運動資訊或用於訊框內預測的訊框內模式資訊)進行熵編碼。熵編碼單元220可以對作為視訊資料的另一實例的語法元素執行一或多個熵編碼操作,以產生經熵編碼的資料。例如,熵編碼單元220可以執行上下文自我調整變長譯碼(CAVLC)操作、CABAC操作、可變-可變(V2V)長度譯碼操作、基於語法的上下文自我調整二進位算術譯碼(SBAC)操作、概率區間分割熵(PIPE)譯碼操作、指數哥倫布編碼操作、或對資料的另一種類型的熵編碼操作。在一些實例中,熵編碼單元220可以在其中語法元素未被熵編碼的旁路模式下操作。In general, entropy encoding unit 220 may entropy encode syntax elements received from other functional components of video transcoder 200 . For example, entropy encoding unit 220 may entropy encode the quantized block of transform coefficients from quantization unit 208. As another example, entropy encoding unit 220 may entropy encode prediction syntax elements from mode selection unit 202 (eg, motion information for inter-frame prediction or intra-frame mode information for intra-frame prediction). Entropy encoding unit 220 may perform one or more entropy encoding operations on syntax elements, which are another example of video data, to generate entropy encoded data. For example, the entropy encoding unit 220 may perform context self-adjusting variable length coding (CAVLC) operations, CABAC operations, variable-variable (V2V) length coding operations, syntax-based context self-adjusting binary arithmetic coding (SBAC) operation, Probability Interval Partitioning Entropy (PIPE) decoding operation, Exponential Golomb encoding operation, or another type of entropy encoding operation on the data. In some examples, entropy encoding unit 220 may operate in a bypass mode in which syntax elements are not entropy encoded.

視訊轉碼器200可以輸出位元串流,其包括用於重建切片或圖片的塊所需要的經熵編碼的語法元素。具體地,熵編碼單元220可以輸出位元串流。Video transcoder 200 may output a bitstream that includes entropy-encoded syntax elements needed to reconstruct blocks of a slice or picture. Specifically, the entropy encoding unit 220 may output a bitstream.

關於塊描述了上述操作。此類描述應當被理解為用於亮度譯碼塊及/或色度譯碼塊的操作。如前述,在一些實例中,亮度譯碼塊和色度譯碼塊是CU的亮度分量和色度分量。在一些實例中,亮度譯碼塊和色度譯碼塊是PU的亮度分量和色度分量。The above operations are described with respect to blocks. Such descriptions should be understood as operations for luma coding blocks and/or chroma coding blocks. As previously described, in some examples, the luma coding blocks and the chroma coding blocks are the luma and chroma components of a CU. In some examples, the luma coding blocks and the chroma coding blocks are the luma and chroma components of the PU.

在一些實例中,不需要針對色度譯碼塊重複關於亮度譯碼塊執行的操作。作為一個實例,不需要重多工於辨識用於亮度譯碼塊的運動向量(MV)和參考圖片的操作來辨識用於色度塊的MV和參考圖片。確切而言,可以對用於亮度譯碼塊的MV進行縮放以決定用於色度塊的MV,並且參考圖片可以是相同的。作為另一實例,對於亮度譯碼塊和色度譯碼塊,訊框內預測程序可以是相同的。In some examples, operations performed with respect to luma coding blocks need not be repeated for chroma coding blocks. As one example, operations to identify motion vectors (MVs) and reference pictures for luma coded blocks need not be multiplexed to identify MVs and reference pictures for chroma blocks. Specifically, the MVs for luma coded blocks may be scaled to decide the MVs for chroma blocks, and the reference pictures may be the same. As another example, the intra-frame prediction procedure may be the same for luma coded blocks and chroma coded blocks.

圖16是示出可以執行本案內容的技術的示例性視訊解碼器300的方塊圖。圖16是出於解釋的目的而提供的,並且不對在本案內容中泛泛地舉例說明和描述的技術進行限制。出於解釋的目的,本案內容根據VVC(正在開發的ITU-T H.266)和HEVC(ITU-T H.265)的技術,描述了視訊解碼器300。然而,本案內容的技術可以由被配置用於其他視訊譯碼標準的視訊譯碼設備來執行。FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary video decoder 300 that may perform the techniques disclosed herein. Figure 16 is provided for purposes of explanation and is not intended to limit the techniques generally illustrated and described in the context of this case. For explanatory purposes, the video decoder 300 is described in terms of VVC (ITU-T H.266 under development) and HEVC (ITU-T H.265) techniques. However, the techniques of this disclosure may be performed by video coding devices configured for other video coding standards.

在圖16的實例中,視訊解碼器300包括經譯碼圖片緩衝器(CPB)記憶體320、熵解碼單元302、預測處理單元304、逆量化單元306、逆變換處理單元308、重建單元310、濾波器單元312和DPB 314。CPB記憶體320、熵解碼單元302、預測處理單元304、逆量化單元306、逆變換處理單元308、重建單元310、濾波器單元312和DPB 134中的任何一者或全部可以在一或多個處理器中或者在處理電路中實現。例如,視訊解碼器300的單元可以被實現為一或多個電路或邏輯部件,作為硬體電路的一部分,或者作為處理器、ASIC或FPGA的一部分。此外,視訊解碼器300可以包括額外或替代的處理器或處理電路以執行這些和其他功能。In the example of FIG. 16, video decoder 300 includes coded picture buffer (CPB) memory 320, entropy decoding unit 302, prediction processing unit 304, inverse quantization unit 306, inverse transform processing unit 308, reconstruction unit 310, Filter unit 312 and DPB 314. Any or all of CPB memory 320, entropy decoding unit 302, prediction processing unit 304, inverse quantization unit 306, inverse transform processing unit 308, reconstruction unit 310, filter unit 312, and DPB 134 may be one or more implemented in a processor or in a processing circuit. For example, the elements of video decoder 300 may be implemented as one or more circuits or logic components, as part of a hardware circuit, or as part of a processor, ASIC or FPGA. Furthermore, video decoder 300 may include additional or alternative processors or processing circuits to perform these and other functions.

預測處理單元304包括運動補償單元316和訊框內預測單元318。預測處理單元304可以包括根據其他預測模式來執行預測的額外單元。作為實例,預測處理單元304可以包括調色板單元、塊內複製單元(其可以形成運動補償單元316的一部分)、仿射單元、線性模型(LM)單元等。在其他實例中,視訊解碼器300可以包括更多、更少或不同的功能部件。Prediction processing unit 304 includes motion compensation unit 316 and intra-frame prediction unit 318 . Prediction processing unit 304 may include additional units that perform prediction according to other prediction modes. As examples, prediction processing unit 304 may include a palette unit, an intra-block copy unit (which may form part of motion compensation unit 316), an affine unit, a linear model (LM) unit, and the like. In other examples, video decoder 300 may include more, fewer, or different functional components.

CPB記憶體320可以儲存要由視訊解碼器300的部件解碼的視訊資料,諸如經編碼的視訊位元串流。例如,可以從電腦可讀取媒體110(圖1)獲得被儲存在CPB記憶體320中的視訊資料。CPB記憶體320可以包括儲存來自經編碼的視訊位元串流的經編碼的視訊資料(例如,語法元素)的CPB。此外,CPB記憶體320可以儲存除了經譯碼的圖片的語法元素之外的視訊資料,諸如表示來自視訊解碼器300的各個單元的輸出的臨時資料。DPB 314通常儲存經解碼的圖片,視訊解碼器300可以輸出經解碼的圖片,及/或在解碼經編碼的視訊位元串流的後續資料或圖片時使用經解碼的圖片作為參考視訊資料。CPB記憶體320和DPB 314可以由各種記憶體設備中的任何一種形成,諸如,DRAM(包括SDRAM)、MRAM、RRAM、或者其他類型的記憶體設備。CPB記憶體320和DPB 314可以由相同的記憶體設備或單獨的記憶體設備來提供。在各個實例中,CPB記憶體320可以與視訊解碼器300的其他部件在晶片上,或者相對於那些部件在晶片外。CPB memory 320 may store video data, such as an encoded video bitstream, to be decoded by components of video decoder 300 . For example, video data stored in CPB memory 320 may be obtained from computer readable medium 110 (FIG. 1). CPB memory 320 may include a CPB that stores encoded video data (eg, syntax elements) from the encoded video bitstream. Additionally, CPB memory 320 may store video data other than syntax elements of the decoded picture, such as temporary data representing outputs from various units of video decoder 300 . DPB 314 typically stores decoded pictures, which video decoder 300 may output and/or use as reference video data when decoding subsequent data or pictures of the encoded video bitstream. CPB memory 320 and DPB 314 may be formed from any of a variety of memory devices, such as DRAM (including SDRAM), MRAM, RRAM, or other types of memory devices. CPB memory 320 and DPB 314 may be provided by the same memory device or by separate memory devices. In various examples, CPB memory 320 may be on-chip with other components of video decoder 300, or off-chip relative to those components.

補充或替代地,在一些實例中,視訊解碼器300可以從記憶體120(圖1)取回經譯碼的視訊資料。亦即,記憶體120可以如上文所論述地利用CPB記憶體320來儲存資料。同樣,當視訊解碼器300的一些或全部功能是用要被視訊解碼器300的處理電路執行的軟體來實現時,記憶體120可以儲存要被視訊解碼器300執行的指令。Additionally or alternatively, in some examples, video decoder 300 may retrieve decoded video data from memory 120 (FIG. 1). That is, memory 120 may utilize CPB memory 320 to store data as discussed above. Likewise, when some or all of the functions of the video decoder 300 are implemented in software to be executed by the processing circuitry of the video decoder 300 , the memory 120 may store instructions to be executed by the video decoder 300 .

圖示圖16中示出的各個單元以説明理解由視訊解碼器300執行的操作。這些單元可以被實現為固定功能電路、可程式設計電路、或其組合。類似於圖15,固定功能電路代表提供特定功能並且關於可以執行的操作而預先設置的電路。可程式設計電路代表可以被程式設計以執行各種任務並且以可以執行的操作來提供靈活功能的電路。例如,可程式設計電路可以執行軟體或韌體,軟體或韌體使得可程式設計電路以軟體或韌體的指令所定義的方式進行操作。固定功能電路可以執行軟體指令(例如,以接收參數或輸出參數),但是固定功能電路執行的操作的類型通常是不可變的。在一些實例中,這些單元中的一或多個單元可以是不同的電路塊(固定功能或可程式設計),並且在一些實例中,這些單元中的一或多個單元可以是積體電路。The various elements shown in FIG. 16 are illustrated to illustrate understanding of the operations performed by the video decoder 300 . These units may be implemented as fixed function circuits, programmable circuits, or a combination thereof. Similar to FIG. 15, fixed function circuits represent circuits that provide specific functions and are preset with respect to operations that can be performed. Programmable circuits represent circuits that can be programmed to perform various tasks and provide flexible functionality in operations that can be performed. For example, the programmable circuit may execute software or firmware that causes the programmable circuit to operate in a manner defined by the instructions of the software or firmware. Fixed-function circuits may execute software instructions (eg, to receive parameters or output parameters), but the type of operations performed by fixed-function circuits is generally immutable. In some instances, one or more of the units may be distinct circuit blocks (fixed function or programmable), and in some instances, one or more of the units may be integrated circuits.

視訊解碼器300可以包括由可程式設計電路形成的ALU、EFU、數位電路、類比電路及/或可程式設計核。在其中由在可程式設計電路上執行的軟體執行視訊解碼器300的操作的實例中,片上或片外記憶體可以儲存視訊解碼器300接收並且執行的軟體的指令(例如,目標代碼)。Video decoder 300 may include ALUs, EFUs, digital circuits, analog circuits, and/or programmable cores formed from programmable circuits. In instances where the operations of video decoder 300 are performed by software executing on programmable circuitry, on-chip or off-chip memory may store instructions (eg, object code) for the software that video decoder 300 receives and executes.

熵解碼單元302可以從CPB接收經編碼的視訊資料,並且對視訊資料進行熵解碼以重現語法元素。預測處理單元304、逆量化單元306、逆變換處理單元308、重建單元310和濾波器單元312可以基於從位元串流中提取的語法元素來產生經解碼的視訊資料。Entropy decoding unit 302 may receive encoded video data from the CPB and entropy decode the video data to reproduce syntax elements. Prediction processing unit 304, inverse quantization unit 306, inverse transform processing unit 308, reconstruction unit 310, and filter unit 312 may generate decoded video data based on syntax elements extracted from the bitstream.

通常,視訊解碼器300逐個塊地重建圖片。視訊解碼器300可以單獨地對每個區塊執行重建操作(其中當前正在被重建(亦即,被解碼)的塊可以被稱為「當前塊」)。Typically, the video decoder 300 reconstructs the picture block by block. Video decoder 300 may perform reconstruction operations on each block individually (where the block currently being reconstructed (ie, decoded) may be referred to as the "current block").

熵解碼單元302可以對定義經量化的變換係數塊的經量化的變換係數的語法元素以及諸如量化參數(QP)及/或變換模式指示之類的變換資訊進行熵解碼。逆量化單元306可以使用與經量化的變換係數塊相關聯的QP來決定量化程度,並且同樣地,決定供逆量化單元306應用的逆量化程度。逆量化單元306可以例如執行按位左移操作以對經量化的變換係數進行逆量化。逆量化單元306從而可以形成包括變換係數的變換係數塊。Entropy decoding unit 302 may entropy decode syntax elements that define the quantized transform coefficients of the quantized transform coefficient block and transform information such as quantization parameters (QPs) and/or transform mode indications. Inverse quantization unit 306 may use the QP associated with the quantized transform coefficient block to determine the degree of quantization, and likewise, the degree of inverse quantization for inverse quantization unit 306 to apply. Inverse quantization unit 306 may, for example, perform a bitwise left shift operation to inverse quantize the quantized transform coefficients. Inverse quantization unit 306 may thus form a block of transform coefficients comprising transform coefficients.

在逆量化單元306形成變換係數塊之後,逆變換處理單元308可以將一或多個逆變換應用於變換係數塊,以產生與當前塊相關聯的殘差塊。例如,逆變換處理單元308可以將逆DCT、逆整數變換、逆Karhunen-Loeve變換(KLT)、逆旋轉變換、逆方向變換或另一逆變換應用於變換係數塊。After inverse quantization unit 306 forms the block of transform coefficients, inverse transform processing unit 308 may apply one or more inverse transforms to the block of transform coefficients to generate a residual block associated with the current block. For example, inverse transform processing unit 308 may apply an inverse DCT, an inverse integer transform, an inverse Karhunen-Loeve transform (KLT), an inverse rotational transform, an inverse directional transform, or another inverse transform to the transform coefficient block.

此外,預測處理單元304根據由熵解碼單元302進行熵解碼的預測資訊語法元素來產生預測塊。例如,若預測資訊語法元素指示當前塊是經訊框間預測的,則運動補償單元316可以產生預測塊。在這種情況下,預測資訊語法元素可以指示在DPB 314中的要從其取回參考塊的參考圖片、以及標識相對於當前塊在當前圖片中的位置而言參考塊在參考圖片中的位置的運動向量。運動補償單元316通常可以以與關於運動補償單元224(圖15)所描述的方式基本類似的方式來執行訊框間預測程序。In addition, prediction processing unit 304 generates prediction blocks from prediction information syntax elements entropy decoded by entropy decoding unit 302 . For example, motion compensation unit 316 may generate a prediction block if the prediction information syntax element indicates that the current block is inter-frame predicted. In this case, the prediction information syntax element may indicate the reference picture in DPB 314 from which the reference block is to be retrieved, and identify the position of the reference block in the reference picture relative to the position of the current block in the current picture motion vector. Motion compensation unit 316 may generally perform an inter-frame prediction procedure in a manner substantially similar to that described with respect to motion compensation unit 224 (FIG. 15).

作為另一實例,若預測資訊語法元素指示當前塊是經訊框內預測的,則訊框內預測單元318可以根據由預測資訊語法元素指示的訊框內預測模式來產生預測塊。再次,訊框內預測單元318通常可以以與關於訊框內預測單元226(圖5)所描述的方式基本上類似的方式來執行訊框內預測程序。訊框內預測單元318可以從DPB 314取回當前塊的相鄰取樣的資料。As another example, if the prediction information syntax element indicates that the current block is intra-predicted, intra-frame prediction unit 318 may generate the prediction block according to the intra-frame prediction mode indicated by the prediction information syntax element. Again, intra-frame prediction unit 318 may generally perform the intra-frame prediction procedure in a manner substantially similar to that described with respect to intra-frame prediction unit 226 (FIG. 5). In-frame prediction unit 318 may retrieve data from DPB 314 for adjacent samples of the current block.

重建單元310可以使用預測塊和殘差塊來重建當前塊。例如,重建單元310可以將殘差塊的取樣與預測塊的對應取樣相加來重建當前塊。The reconstruction unit 310 may reconstruct the current block using the prediction block and the residual block. For example, reconstruction unit 310 may add samples of the residual block to corresponding samples of the prediction block to reconstruct the current block.

濾波器單元312可以對經重建的塊執行一或多個濾波器操作。例如,濾波器單元312可以執行去塊操作以減少沿著經重建的塊的邊緣的塊效應偽影。不一定在所有實例中皆執行濾波器單元312的操作。Filter unit 312 may perform one or more filter operations on the reconstructed block. For example, filter unit 312 may perform a deblocking operation to reduce blocking artifacts along edges of reconstructed blocks. The operations of filter unit 312 are not necessarily performed in all instances.

視訊解碼器300可以將經重建的塊儲存在DPB 314中。例如,在不執行濾波器單元312的操作的實例中,重建單元310可將重建塊儲存到DPB 314。在執行濾波器單元312的操作的實例中,濾波器單元312可以將濾波後的重建塊儲存到DPB 314。如上所論述的,DPB 314可以將參考資訊(諸如用於訊框內預測的當前圖片以及用於後續運動補償的先前解碼的圖片的取樣)提供給預測處理單元304。此外,視訊解碼器300可以從DPB 314輸出經解碼的圖片(例如,經解碼的視訊),以用於在諸如圖1的顯示設備118之類的顯示設備上的後續呈現。Video decoder 300 may store the reconstructed blocks in DPB 314 . For example, reconstruction unit 310 may store the reconstructed block to DPB 314 in instances where the operations of filter unit 312 are not performed. In instances where the operations of filter unit 312 are performed, filter unit 312 may store the filtered reconstructed block to DPB 314 . As discussed above, DPB 314 may provide reference information, such as the current picture for intra-frame prediction and samples of previously decoded pictures for subsequent motion compensation, to prediction processing unit 304 . Furthermore, video decoder 300 may output decoded pictures (eg, decoded video) from DPB 314 for subsequent presentation on a display device, such as display device 118 of FIG. 1 .

圖17圖示圖16中的濾波器單元312的示例性實施方式。圖15中的濾波器單元216可以經由相同的方式來實施。濾波器單元216和312可以執行本案內容的技術,有可能結合視訊轉碼器200或視訊解碼器300的其他組件。在圖16的實例中,濾波器單元312包括解塊濾波器342、SAO濾波器344和ALF單元346。SAO濾波器344可以例如被配置為以本案內容中描述的方式來決定用於塊的取樣的偏移值。ALF單元346同樣可以經由本案內容中描述的方式來對視訊資料的塊進行濾波。例如,ALF單元346可以被配置為將第一階段ALF應用於重建塊的重建取樣,以決定第一取樣修改值,將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣以決定第二取樣修改值,以及,基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值,來決定經濾波的重建取樣。FIG. 17 illustrates an exemplary implementation of the filter unit 312 in FIG. 16 . The filter unit 216 in Figure 15 may be implemented via the same approach. Filter units 216 and 312 may implement the techniques described herein, possibly in conjunction with other components of video transcoder 200 or video decoder 300. In the example of FIG. 16 , filter unit 312 includes deblocking filter 342 , SAO filter 344 , and ALF unit 346 . The SAO filter 344 may, for example, be configured to decide offset values for sampling of the block in the manner described in the context of this application. ALF unit 346 may also filter blocks of video data in the manner described in the context of this application. For example, the ALF unit 346 may be configured to apply a first stage ALF to reconstructed samples of the reconstructed block to determine a first sample modification value, apply a second stage ALF to the reconstructed samples to determine a second sample modification value, and, based on The reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value determine the filtered reconstructed samples.

濾波器單元312可以包括更少的濾波器及/或可以包括額外濾波器。此外,圖17中所示的特定濾波器可以按照不同的順序來實施。其他迴路濾波器(在譯碼迴路中,或在譯碼迴路之後)亦可以用於平滑圖元過渡或以其他方式提高視訊品質。由濾波器單元312輸出的經濾波的重建視訊塊可以儲存在DPB 314中,DPB 314儲存用於後續運動補償的參考圖片。DPB 314可以是額外記憶體的一部分或與額外記憶體分開,該額外記憶體儲存解碼視訊以供稍後在顯示設備(例如圖1的顯示設備118)上呈現。Filter unit 312 may include fewer filters and/or may include additional filters. Furthermore, the particular filters shown in Figure 17 may be implemented in a different order. Other in-loop filters (in the decoding loop, or after the decoding loop) can also be used to smooth primitive transitions or otherwise improve video quality. The filtered reconstructed video blocks output by filter unit 312 may be stored in DPB 314, which stores reference pictures for subsequent motion compensation. DPB 314 may be part of or separate from additional memory that stores decoded video for later presentation on a display device (eg, display device 118 of FIG. 1 ).

圖18是示出根據本案內容的技術用於對當前塊進行編碼的實例程序的流程圖。當前塊可以包括當前CU。儘管關於視訊轉碼器200(圖1和圖14)進行了描述,但是應當理解的是,其他設備可以被配置為執行與圖18的程序類似的程序。18 is a flow diagram illustrating an example procedure for encoding a current block in accordance with the techniques of this disclosure. The current block may include the current CU. Although described with respect to the video transcoder 200 ( FIGS. 1 and 14 ), it should be understood that other devices may be configured to perform a procedure similar to that of FIG. 18 .

在本實例中,視訊轉碼器200起初預測當前塊(650)。例如,視訊轉碼器200可以形成用於當前塊的預測塊。隨後,視訊轉碼器200可以計算用於當前塊的殘差塊(652)。為了計算殘差塊,視訊轉碼器200可以計算在原始的未經編碼的塊與用於當前塊的預測塊之間的差。隨後,視訊轉碼器200可以對殘差塊進行變換,並且對該殘差塊的變換係數進行量化(654)。接下來,視訊轉碼器200可以掃瞄殘差塊的經量化的變換係數(656)。在掃瞄期間或在掃瞄之後,視訊轉碼器200可以對變換係數進行熵編碼(658)。例如,視訊轉碼器200可以使用CAVLC或CABAC來對變換係數進行編碼。隨後,視訊轉碼器200可以輸出該塊的經熵編碼的資料(660)。In this example, video transcoder 200 initially predicts the current block (650). For example, video transcoder 200 may form a prediction block for the current block. Subsequently, video transcoder 200 may calculate a residual block for the current block (652). To calculate the residual block, video transcoder 200 may calculate the difference between the original unencoded block and the predicted block for the current block. Then, video transcoder 200 may transform the residual block and quantize the transform coefficients of the residual block (654). Next, video transcoder 200 may scan the residual block for the quantized transform coefficients (656). During or after the scan, video transcoder 200 may entropy encode the transform coefficients (658). For example, video transcoder 200 may use CAVLC or CABAC to encode transform coefficients. Video transcoder 200 may then output entropy encoded data for the block (660).

圖19是示出根據本案內容的技術用於對視訊資料的當前塊進行解碼的實例方法的流程圖。當前塊可以包括當前CU。儘管關於視訊解碼器300(圖1和圖15)進行了描述,但是應當理解的是,其他設備可以被配置為執行與圖19的程序類似的程序。19 is a flowchart illustrating an example method for decoding a current block of video material in accordance with the techniques of this disclosure. The current block may include the current CU. Although described with respect to video decoder 300 (FIGS. 1 and 15), it should be understood that other devices may be configured to perform a procedure similar to that of FIG. 19 .

視訊解碼器300可以接收用於當前塊的經熵編碼的資料(例如,經熵編碼的預測資訊和用於與當前塊相對應的殘差塊的變換係數的經熵編碼的資料)(670)。視訊解碼器300可以對經熵編碼的資料進行熵解碼以決定用於當前塊的預測資訊並且重現殘差塊的變換係數(672)。視訊解碼器300可以例如使用如用於當前塊的預測資訊所指示的訊框內或訊框間預測模式來預測當前塊(674),以便計算用於當前塊的預測塊。隨後,視訊解碼器300可以對經再現的變換係數進行逆掃瞄(676),以建立經量化的變換係數的塊。隨後,視訊解碼器300可以對變換係數進行逆量化,並將逆變換應用於變換係數以產生殘差塊(678)。視訊解碼器300可以經由組合預測塊和殘差塊來對當前塊進行最終解碼(680)。Video decoder 300 may receive entropy-encoded data for the current block (eg, entropy-encoded prediction information and entropy-encoded data for transform coefficients of residual blocks corresponding to the current block) (670) . Video decoder 300 may entropy decode the entropy encoded data to determine prediction information for the current block and reproduce transform coefficients for the residual block (672). Video decoder 300 may predict the current block, eg, using an intra-frame or inter-frame prediction mode as indicated by the prediction information for the current block (674), in order to calculate a prediction block for the current block. Video decoder 300 may then inverse scan (676) the rendered transform coefficients to create a block of quantized transform coefficients. Video decoder 300 may then inverse quantize the transform coefficients and apply an inverse transform to the transform coefficients to generate a residual block (678). Video decoder 300 may finally decode the current block by combining the prediction block and the residual block (680).

圖20是示出根據本案內容的技術用於解碼當前視訊資料區塊的實例程序的流程圖。儘管參照視訊解碼器300(圖1和圖15)進行了描述,但是應當理解,其他設備可以被配置為執行類似於圖20的程序。舉例而言,包含濾波器單元216的視訊轉碼器200的視訊解碼循環可以執行圖20的技術。20 is a flow diagram illustrating an example procedure for decoding a current block of video data in accordance with the techniques disclosed herein. Although described with reference to video decoder 300 (FIGS. 1 and 15), it should be understood that other devices may be configured to perform a procedure similar to that of FIG. For example, the video decoding loop of video transcoder 200 including filter unit 216 may perform the technique of FIG. 20 .

視訊解碼器300將第一階段ALF應用於重建塊的重建取樣,其中應用第一階段ALF包括(710)。在此上下文中,重建取樣可以是在解塊濾波(deblock filtering)之前或解塊濾波之後的重建取樣。為了應用第一階段ALF,視訊解碼器300決定用於重建取樣的第一類別索引(712),基於第一類別索引從第一組濾波器中選擇濾波器(714),以及,向重建取樣應用來自第一組濾波器的濾波器以決定第一中間取樣值(716)。如前述,視訊解碼器300可以基於用於重建塊的量化參數,從複數組固定濾波器中選擇第一組濾波器。例如,第一組濾波器可以是固定濾波器。亦即,第一組濾波器可以是被儲存在視訊轉碼器中而不是在視訊資料中用訊號發送的一組濾波器。第一組濾波器可以例如包括至少一個9×9菱形濾波器或上述任何尺寸或形狀的濾波器。如圖9和圖11所示,視訊解碼器可以決定多個中間取樣值。The video decoder 300 applies the first-stage ALF to reconstructed samples of the reconstructed block, wherein applying the first-stage ALF includes (710). In this context, reconstructed samples may be reconstructed samples before deblock filtering or after deblock filtering. To apply the first stage ALF, the video decoder 300 determines a first class index for reconstructed samples (712), selects a filter from a first set of filters based on the first class index (714), and applies to the reconstructed samples Filters from the first set of filters to determine first intermediate sample values (716). As previously described, the video decoder 300 may select the first set of filters from the complex set of fixed filters based on the quantization parameters used to reconstruct the block. For example, the first set of filters may be fixed filters. That is, the first set of filters may be a set of filters stored in the video transcoder rather than signaled in the video data. The first set of filters may, for example, comprise at least one 9x9 diamond filter or filters of any size or shape described above. As shown in Figures 9 and 11, the video decoder can determine multiple intermediate sample values.

為了決定第一類別索引,視訊解碼器300可以決定用於重建取樣的活動值,決定用於重建取樣的方向,以及基於活動值和方向來決定分類器。如前述,方向的數量可以是

Figure 02_image183
,其中S = 6意味著有56個方向。 To determine the first class index, the video decoder 300 may determine the activity value for reconstructing the sample, determine the direction for the reconstruction sample, and determine a classifier based on the activity value and direction. As before, the number of directions can be
Figure 02_image183
, where S = 6 means there are 56 directions.

視訊解碼器300將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣(720)。為了應用第二階段ALF,視訊解碼器300決定用於重建取樣的第二類別索引(722),基於第二類別索引從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器(724),將第二濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一取樣修改值(726),以及,基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值。第二組濾波器可以例如是用訊號發送的濾波器,這意味著第二組中的濾波器是至少部分地在視訊資料中用訊號發送的。Video decoder 300 applies the second stage ALF to reconstructed samples (720). To apply the second stage ALF, the video decoder 300 determines a second class index for reconstructing samples (722), selects a second filter from a second set of filters based on the second class index (724), A processor is applied to the reconstructed samples to determine a first sample modification value (726), and, based on the first intermediate sample value, to determine a second sample modification value. The second set of filters may eg be signaled filters, which means that the filters in the second set are signaled at least partly in the video data.

視訊解碼器300基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值來決定經濾波的重建取樣(730)。為了基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值來決定經濾波的重建取樣,視訊解碼器300可以例如將第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值添加到重建取樣。上面的等式(28)表示視訊解碼器300可以如何決定用於經濾波的重建取樣的值的一個實例。Video decoder 300 determines filtered reconstructed samples based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value (730). To determine the filtered reconstructed samples based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value, video decoder 300 may, for example, add the first sample modification value and the second sample modification value to the reconstructed samples. Equation (28) above represents one example of how video decoder 300 may decide the values for the filtered reconstructed samples.

為了基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值,視訊解碼器300可以修剪第二取樣修改值以決定經修剪的取樣修改值,並將第一取樣修改值和經修剪的取樣修改值添加到重建取樣。視訊解碼器300可以在視訊資料中接收經修剪的取樣修改值。為了基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值,視訊解碼器300亦可以經由決定重建取樣與第一中間取樣值之間的差值,基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值。上面的等式(28)和(30)表示視訊解碼器300可以如何決定第二取樣修改值的實例。To determine the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value, video decoder 300 may trim the second sample modification value to determine the trimmed sample modification value, and add the first sample modification value and the trimmed sample modification value to reconstruction sampling. Video decoder 300 may receive trimmed sample modification values in video data. In order to determine the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value, the video decoder 300 may also determine the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value by determining the difference between the reconstructed sample and the first intermediate sample value . Equations (28) and (30) above represent examples of how the video decoder 300 may determine the second sample modification value.

視訊解碼器300可以輸出包括經濾波重建取樣的視訊資料的經解碼圖片。在一些譯碼場景中,視訊解碼器300可以在輸出之前對經濾波重建取樣執行一或多個額外濾波操作。視訊解碼器300可以經由將圖片儲存在解碼圖片緩衝器中以用於對後續圖片進行解碼,將解碼圖片儲存到儲存媒體以供後續顯示,或者經由將解碼圖片即時輸出到顯示設備或接近即時顯示,從而輸出解碼圖片。在其中圖20的技術被視訊轉碼器執行的情況下,但是視訊轉碼器可以例如經由將圖片儲存在解碼圖片緩衝器中以用於對後續圖片進行編碼來輸出解碼圖片。Video decoder 300 may output decoded pictures that include filtered reconstructed sampled video data. In some coding scenarios, video decoder 300 may perform one or more additional filtering operations on the filtered reconstructed samples prior to output. The video decoder 300 may store the picture in a decoded picture buffer for decoding subsequent pictures, store the decoded picture in a storage medium for subsequent display, or by outputting the decoded picture in real time to a display device or near real time display , so as to output the decoded picture. 20 is performed by a video transcoder, but the video transcoder may output decoded pictures, eg, by storing the pictures in a decoded picture buffer for encoding subsequent pictures.

以下編號的條款說明了本案內容中描述的設備和技術的一或多個態樣。The following numbered clauses describe one or more aspects of the devices and techniques described in the content of this case.

條款1A. 一種對視訊資料進行解碼的方法,該方法包括:決定重建的視訊資料區塊;及,將濾波器應用於重建的視訊資料區塊的取樣以產生經濾波的重建塊。Clause 1A. A method of decoding video data, the method comprising: determining a reconstructed block of video data; and applying a filter to samples of the reconstructed block of video data to generate a filtered reconstructed block.

條款2A. 根據條款1A所述的方法,其中將該濾波器應用於取樣包括:決定用於取樣的活動值和用於取樣的方向之一或兩者;及,基於所決定的活動值及/或方向,從一組濾波器中選擇濾波器。Clause 2A. The method of Clause 1A, wherein applying the filter to sampling comprises: determining one or both of an activity value for sampling and a direction for sampling; and, based on the determined activity value and/or or Direction, to select a filter from a set of filters.

條款3A. 根據條款2A所述的方法,其中該一組濾波器包括一組固定濾波器。Clause 3A. The method of Clause 2A, wherein the set of filters comprises a set of fixed filters.

條款4A. 根據條款2A所述的方法,其中該一組濾波器包括一組用訊號發送的濾波器。Clause 4A. The method of clause 2A, wherein the set of filters comprises a set of signaled filters.

條款5A. 條款1A-4A中任一項所述的方法,其中將濾波器應用於取樣包括:將第一濾波器應用於取樣以決定中間濾波取樣;及,將第二濾波器應用於中間濾波取樣以決定取樣的最終濾波器。Clause 5A. The method of any of Clauses 1A-4A, wherein applying a filter to the samples comprises: applying a first filter to the samples to determine intermediate filtered samples; and, applying a second filter to the intermediate filtering Samples to determine the final filter of the samples.

條款6A. 根據條款1A-5A中任一項所述的方法,其中該解碼方法作為視訊編碼程序的一部分而被執行。Clause 6A. The method of any of clauses 1A-5A, wherein the decoding method is performed as part of a video encoding procedure.

條款7A.一種用於對視訊資料進行譯碼的設備,該設備包括用於執行條款1A-6A中任一項所述的方法的一或多個單元。Clause 7A. An apparatus for decoding video material, the apparatus comprising one or more means for performing the method of any of clauses 1A-6A.

條款8A. 根據條款7A所述的設備,其中該一或多個單元包括在電路中實施的一或多個處理器。Clause 8A. The apparatus of clause 7A, wherein the one or more units comprise one or more processors implemented in a circuit.

條款9A. 根據條款7A和8A中任一項所述的設備,亦包括:用於儲存該視訊資料的記憶體。Clause 9A. The apparatus of any of clauses 7A and 8A, further comprising: memory for storing the video data.

條款10A. 根據條款7A-9A中任一項所述的設備,亦包括:被配置為顯示經解碼視訊資料的顯示器。Clause 10A. The apparatus of any of clauses 7A-9A, further comprising: a display configured to display the decoded video data.

條款11A. 根據條款7A-10A中任一項所述的設備,其中該設備包括以下各項中的一項或多項:相機、電腦、行動設備、廣播接收器設備、或者機上盒。Clause 11A. The apparatus of any of Clauses 7A-10A, wherein the apparatus comprises one or more of the following: a camera, a computer, a mobile device, a broadcast receiver device, or a set-top box.

條款12A. 根據條款7A-11A中任一項所述的設備,其中該設備包括視訊解碼器。Clause 12A. The apparatus of any of clauses 7A-11A, wherein the apparatus comprises a video decoder.

條款13A. 根據條款7A-12A中任一項所述的設備,其中該設備包括視訊轉碼器。Clause 13A. The apparatus of any of clauses 7A-12A, wherein the apparatus comprises a video transcoder.

條款14A. 一種其上儲存有指令的電腦可讀取儲存媒體,該等指令當被執行時使得一或多個處理器執行條款1A-6A中任一項所述的方法。Clause 14A. A computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon instructions that, when executed, cause one or more processors to perform the method of any of Clauses 1A-6A.

條款1B. 一種對視訊資料進行解碼的方法,該方法包括:對視訊資料的圖片的至少一部分進行解碼;在自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF)的第一階段期間將一或多個ALF應用於圖像的至少一部分,以產生圖像的至少一部分的濾波取樣;決定是否對圖片的至少一部分執行ALF的第二階段;當決定不執行第二階段ALF時,避免對用於ALF的第二階段的一或多個ALF的濾波器係數進行解碼,並且避免對圖像的至少一部分執行ALF的第二階段;及,使用經濾波取樣,產生針對圖片的至少一部分的最終取樣。Clause 1B. A method of decoding video data, the method comprising: decoding at least a portion of a picture of the video data; applying one or more ALFs to the picture during a first stage of a self-adjusting loop filter (ALF) at least part of the image to generate filtered samples of at least part of the image; deciding whether to perform the second stage of ALF on at least a part of the picture; when deciding not to perform the second stage ALF, avoid the second stage for the ALF Decode the filter coefficients of the one or more ALFs and avoid performing the second stage of the ALF on at least a portion of the picture; and, using the filtered samples, generate final samples for at least a portion of the picture.

條款2B. 根據條款1B所述的方法,其中使用經濾波取樣來產生最終取樣包括:根據

Figure 02_image177
,其中R̃(x,y)表示在位置(x,y)處的最終取樣之一,w i包括針對一或多個ALF的第i個ALF的權重值,並且R'(x, y, i)包括由第i個ALF在位置(x, y)產生的經濾波取樣之一。 Clause 2B. The method of Clause 1B, wherein using the filtered samples to generate the final samples comprises: according to
Figure 02_image177
, where R̃(x, y) represents one of the final samples at position (x, y), wi includes the weight value of the ith ALF for one or more ALFs, and R'(x, y, i ) includes one of the filtered samples produced by the ith ALF at position (x, y).

條款3B. 根據條款2B所述的方法,亦包括:根據固定配置資料來決定權重值w iClause 3B. The method of Clause 2B, further comprising: determining the weight value w i according to the fixed configuration data.

條款4B. 根據條款2B所述的方法,亦包括:根據經解碼的濾波器使用資訊來決定權重值w iClause 4B. The method of Clause 2B, further comprising: determining weight values wi based on the decoded filter usage information.

條款5B. 根據條款2B所述的方法,亦包括:對權重值w i進行解碼。 Clause 5B. The method of Clause 2B, further comprising: decoding the weight value wi .

條款6B. 根據條款5B所述的方法,其中對權重值w i進行解碼包括:根據序列參數集(SPS)、圖片參數集(PPS)、切片標頭、子圖片標頭、譯碼樹單元(CTU)標頭、譯碼樹塊(CTB)標頭或子塊標頭中的一或多個,對權重值w i進行解碼。 Clause 6B. The method of Clause 5B, wherein decoding the weight value wi comprises: from a sequence parameter set (SPS), a picture parameter set (PPS), a slice header, a sub-picture header, a coding tree unit ( One or more of a CTU) header, a coding tree block (CTB) header, or a sub-block header, decode the weight value wi .

條款7B. 根據條款2B-6B中任一項的方法,亦包括:對表示要用於一或多個最終取樣的權重值w i的組合的語法元素的資料進行解碼。 Clause 7B. The method of any of Clauses 2B-6B, further comprising: decoding data representing syntax elements to be used for the combination of weight values wi for one or more final samples.

條款8B. 根據條款1B-7B中任一項的方法,其中決定是否執行ALF的第二階段包括:對表示是否執行ALF的第二階段的資料進行解碼。Clause 8B. The method of any of Clauses 1B-7B, wherein determining whether to perform the second stage of the ALF comprises decoding the material indicating whether to perform the second stage of the ALF.

條款9B. 根據條款 8B 所述的方法,其中對表示是否執行ALF的第二階段的資料進行解碼包括:對序列參數集(SPS)、圖片參數集(PPS)、切片標頭、子圖片標頭、譯碼樹單元(CTU)標頭、譯碼樹塊(CTB)標頭或子塊標頭中的一或多個的資料進行解碼。Clause 9B. The method of Clause 8B, wherein decoding the material indicating whether to perform the second stage of the ALF comprises: decoding a sequence parameter set (SPS), a picture parameter set (PPS), a slice header, a sub-picture header , a Coding Tree Unit (CTU) header, a Coding Tree Block (CTB) header, or one or more of the sub-block headers for decoding.

條款10B. 根據條款8B和9B中任一項所述的方法,其中對表示是否執行ALF的第二階段的資料進行解碼包括:對針對語法元素的值進行解碼,該值指示將要繞過ALF的第二階段。Clause 10B. The method of any of clauses 8B and 9B, wherein decoding the material indicating whether to perform the second stage of the ALF comprises decoding a value for a syntax element indicating that the ALF is to be bypassed second stage.

條款11B. 根據條款1B-7B中任一項所述的方法,其中決定是否執行ALF的第二階段包括:根據先前譯碼的編碼資訊,自我調整地推導是否執行ALF的第二階段。Clause 11B. The method of any of clauses 1B-7B, wherein determining whether to perform the second stage of ALF comprises: self-adjustingly deriving whether to perform the second stage of ALF based on previously decoded encoding information.

條款12B. 根據條款11B所述的方法,其中該先前譯碼的編碼資訊包括以下各項中的一項或多項:針對該圖片的至少一部分中的塊的量化參數(QP)、塊的大小、或者是否使用訊框內預測或訊框間預測來預測塊。Clause 12B. The method of Clause 11B, wherein the previously coded encoding information includes one or more of: a quantization parameter (QP) for a block in at least a portion of the picture, a size of a block, Or whether to use intra-frame prediction or inter-frame prediction to predict the block.

條款13B. 根據條款1B-12B中任一項所述的方法,其中使用經濾波的取樣來產生最終取樣包括:縮放經濾波取樣以產生最終取樣。Clause 13B. The method of any of Clauses 1B-12B, wherein using the filtered samples to generate final samples comprises scaling the filtered samples to generate final samples.

條款14B. 根據條款1B-13B中任一項所述的方法,亦包括:在對圖片的至少一部分進行解碼之前,對圖片的至少一部分進行編碼。Clause 14B. The method of any of Clauses 1B-13B, further comprising: encoding at least a portion of the picture prior to decoding at least the portion of the picture.

條款15B. 一種用於對視訊資料進行解碼的設備,該設備包括用於執行根據條款1B-14B中任一項所述的方法的一或多個單元。Clause 15B. An apparatus for decoding video material, the apparatus comprising one or more means for performing the method of any of Clauses 1B-14B.

條款16B. 根據條款15B該的設備,其中該一或多個單元包括在電路中實施的一或多個處理器。Clause 16B. The apparatus of clause 15B, wherein the one or more units comprise one or more processors implemented in a circuit.

條款17B. 根據條款15B和16B中任一項所述的設備,亦包括:被配置為顯示經解碼的視訊資料的顯示器。Clause 17B. The apparatus of any of clauses 15B and 16B, further comprising: a display configured to display the decoded video material.

條款18B. 根據條款15B-17B中任一項所述的設備,其中該設備包括以下各項中的一項或多項:相機、電腦、行動設備、廣播接收器設備、或者機上盒。。Clause 18B. The device of any of Clauses 15B-17B, wherein the device comprises one or more of the following: a camera, a computer, a mobile device, a broadcast receiver device, or a set-top box. .

條款19B. 根據條款15B-18B所述的設備,亦包括:被配置為儲存該視訊資料的記憶體。Clause 19B. The apparatus of clauses 15B-18B, further comprising: memory configured to store the video data.

條款20B. 一種具有儲存在其上的指令的電腦可讀取儲存媒體,該等指令在被執行時使得用於對視訊資料進行解碼的設備的處理器執行根據條款1B-14B中任一項該的方法。Clause 20B. A computer-readable storage medium having instructions stored thereon that, when executed, cause a processor of an apparatus for decoding video data to perform the Methods.

條款21B. 一種用於對視訊資料進行解碼的設備,該設備包括:用於對視訊資料的圖片的至少一部分進行解碼的單元;用於在自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF)的第一階段期間將一或多個ALF應用於圖像的至少一部分以產生用於圖像的至少一部分的經濾波取樣的單元;用於決定是否對圖片的至少一部分執行ALF的第二階段的單元;用於當決定不執行ALF的第二階段時,避免對ALF的第二階段的一或多個ALF的濾波器係數進行解碼的單元;用於當決定不執行ALF的第二階段時,避免對圖片的至少一部分執行ALF的第二階段的單元;及,用於使用經濾波取樣來產生針對圖片的該至少一部分的最終取樣的單元。Clause 21B. An apparatus for decoding video data, the apparatus comprising: means for decoding at least a portion of a picture of the video data; means for applying one or more ALFs to at least a portion of an image to generate filtered samples for at least a portion of the image; means for deciding whether to perform a second stage of the ALF on at least a portion of the picture; means for determining when A unit that avoids decoding one or more filter coefficients of the ALF in the second stage of the ALF when the second stage of the ALF is not performed; used to avoid decoding at least a portion of the picture when it is decided not to perform the second stage of the ALF means for performing a second stage of the ALF; and means for using the filtered samples to generate final samples for the at least a portion of the picture.

條款1C. 一種對視訊資料進行解碼的方法,該方法包括:將第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF)應用於重建塊的重建取樣,其中應用該第一階段ALF包括:決定針對重建取樣的第一類別索引;基於第一類別索引,從第一組濾波器中選擇濾波器;及,將來自第一組濾波器的濾波器應用於重建取樣,以決定第一中間取樣值;將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣,其中應用第二階段ALF包括:決定用於重建取樣的第二類別索引;基於第二類別索引,從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器;將第二濾波器應用於重建取樣,以決定第一取樣修改值;基於第一中間取樣值,決定第二取樣修改值;及,基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值,來決定經濾波重建取樣。Clause 1C. A method of decoding video data, the method comprising: applying a first stage self-adjusting loop filter (ALF) to reconstructed samples of a reconstructed block, wherein applying the first stage ALF comprises: determining a a first class index; selecting a filter from the first set of filters based on the first class index; and applying a filter from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine the first intermediate sample value; applying the second The stage ALF is applied to the reconstructed sampling, wherein applying the second stage ALF includes: determining a second class index for the reconstructed sampling; selecting a second filter from the second set of filters based on the second class index; apply to the reconstructed samples to determine a first sample modification value; determine a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value; and determine a filtered reconstruction based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value and the second sample modification value sampling.

條款2C. 根據條款1C所述的方法,其中第一組濾波器包括固定濾波器。Clause 2C. The method of Clause 1C, wherein the first set of filters comprises fixed filters.

條款3C. 根據條款1C-2C中任一項所述的方法,其中第二組濾波器包括:基於在視訊資料中用訊號發送的語法而決定的用訊號發送的濾波器。Clause 3C. The method of any of Clauses 1C-2C, wherein the second set of filters comprises: a signaled filter determined based on a syntax for signaling in the video data.

條款4C. 根據條款1C-3C中任一項所述的方法,其中決定第一類別索引包括:決定用於重建取樣的活動值;決定用於重建取樣的方向;及,基於活動值和方向來決定第一類別索引。Clause 4C. The method of any of Clauses 1C-3C, wherein determining the first category index comprises: determining an activity value for reconstructing sampling; determining a direction for reconstructing sampling; and, based on the activity value and the direction Determine the first category index.

條款5C. 根據條款4C所述的方法,其中決定方向包括:將56個值之一分配給方向。Clause 5C. The method of Clause 4C, wherein determining the direction comprises assigning one of 56 values to the direction.

條款6C. 根據條款1C-5C中任一項所述的方法,其中第一組濾波器包括9x9菱形濾波器。Clause 6C. The method of any of Clauses 1C-5C, wherein the first set of filters comprises 9x9 diamond filters.

條款7C. 根據條款1C-6C中任一項所述的方法,其中基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值來決定經濾波重建取樣包括:將第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值添加到重建取樣。Clause 7C. The method of any of Clauses 1C-6C, wherein determining the filtered reconstructed samples based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value comprises: combining the first sample modification value and the second sample modification value The sample modification value is added to the reconstructed sample.

條款8C. 根據條款1C-7C中任一項的方法,其中基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值包括:修剪第二取樣修改值以決定經修剪的取樣修改值,以及,將第一取樣修改值和經修剪的取樣修改值添加到重建取樣。Clause 8C. The method of any of Clauses 1C-7C, wherein determining the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value comprises trimming the second sample modification value to determine the trimmed sample modification value, and A sample modification value and the trimmed sample modification value are added to the reconstructed samples.

條款9C. 根據條款8C所述的方法,亦包括:在視訊資料中接收經修剪的取樣修改值。Clause 9C. The method of Clause 8C, further comprising: receiving a trimmed sample modification value in the video data.

條款10C. 根據條款1C-9C中任一項所述的方法,其中基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值包括:決定重建取樣與第一中間取樣值之間的差。Clause 10C. The method of any of Clauses 1C-9C, wherein determining the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value comprises determining a difference between the reconstructed sample and the first intermediate sample value.

條款11C. 根據條款1C-10C中任一項所述的方法,亦包括:基於用於重建塊的量化參數,來從複數組固定濾波器中選擇第一組濾波器。Clause 11C. The method of any of Clauses 1C-10C, further comprising: selecting the first set of filters from the complex set of fixed filters based on quantization parameters used to reconstruct the block.

條款12C. 根據條款1C-11C中任一項所述的方法,其中應用第一階段ALF亦包括:決定用於重建取樣的第三類別索引,基於第三類別索引從第二組濾波器中選擇第三濾波器;及,將來自第二組濾波器的第三濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第二中間取樣值;並且將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣亦包括:基於第一中間取樣值和第二中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值。Clause 12C. The method of any of Clauses 1C-11C, wherein applying the first stage ALF also comprises: determining a third class index for reconstructing samples, selecting from the second set of filters based on the third class index and, applying a third filter from the second set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine second intermediate sample values; and applying the second stage ALF to the reconstructed samples also includes: based on the first intermediate sample values and the second intermediate sample value to determine the second sample modification value.

條款13C. 根據條款1C-12C中的任一項所述的方法,亦包括:將預測取樣值與殘差取樣值相加以決定該重建取樣。Clause 13C. The method of any of Clauses 1C-12C, further comprising: adding the prediction samples and the residual samples to determine the reconstructed samples.

條款14C. 根據條款13C中任一項所述的方法,亦包括:將去塊濾波器應用於預測取樣值和殘差取樣值之和,以決定重建取樣。Clause 14C. The method of any of Clause 13C, further comprising applying a deblocking filter to the sum of the prediction samples and the residual samples to determine the reconstructed samples.

條款15C. 根據條款1C-14C中任一項所述的方法,亦包括:輸出該視訊資料的解碼圖片,其中該解碼圖片包括經濾波的重建取樣。Clause 15C. The method of any of clauses 1C-14C, further comprising: outputting a decoded picture of the video data, wherein the decoded picture includes filtered reconstructed samples.

條款16C. 根據條款1C-14C中任一項所述的方法,其中該解碼方法是作為視訊編碼程序的一部分而被執行的。Clause 16C. The method of any of clauses 1C-14C, wherein the decoding method is performed as part of a video encoding procedure.

條款17C. 一種對視訊資料進行解碼的設備,該設備包括:記憶體,被配置為儲存視訊資料;在電路中實施並被配置為以下操作的一或多個處理器:將第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF)應用於重建塊的重建取樣,其中為了應用第一階段ALF,一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的第一類別索引;基於第一類別索引,從第一組濾波器中選擇濾波器;及,將來自第一組濾波器的濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一中間取樣值;將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣,其中為了應用第二階段ALF,一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定重建取樣的第二類別索引;基於第二類別索引,從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器;將第二濾波器應用於重建取樣,以決定第一取樣修改值;基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值;及,基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值,來決定經濾波的重建取樣。Clause 17C. An apparatus for decoding video data, the apparatus comprising: memory configured to store video data; one or more processors implemented in circuitry and configured to: self-adjust the first stage An in-loop filter (ALF) is applied to the reconstructed samples of the reconstructed block, wherein in order to apply the first stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determine a first class index for the reconstructed samples; based on the first class index, selecting filters from the first set of filters; and applying filters from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine first intermediate sample values; applying a second stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, wherein in order to apply the second In stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determine a second class index of the reconstructed samples; select a second filter from the second set of filters based on the second class index; apply the second filter to the reconstruction sampling to determine a first sample modification value; determining a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value; and determining a filtered reconstructed sample based on the reconstructed sample, the first sample modification value and the second sample modification value.

條款18C. 根據條款17C所述的設備,其中第一組濾波器包括固定濾波器。Clause 18C. The apparatus of clause 17C, wherein the first set of filters comprises fixed filters.

條款19C. 根據條款17C-18C中任一項所述的設備,其中該第二組濾波器包括:基於在視訊資料中用訊號發送的語法而被決定的用訊號發送的濾波器。Clause 19C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-18C, wherein the second set of filters comprises: a signaled filter determined based on a syntax of the signaled in the video data.

條款20C. 根據條款17C-19C中任一項所述的設備,其中為了決定第一類別索引,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的活動值;決定用於重建取樣的方向;及,基於活動值和方向來決定第一類別索引。Clause 20C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-19C, wherein to determine the first class index, the one or more processors are also configured to: determine an activity value for reconstruction sampling; determine for reconstruction the direction of sampling; and, determining the first class index based on the activity value and the direction.

條款21C. 根據條款20C所述的設備,其中為了決定方向,一或多個處理器亦被配置為將56個值之一分配給方向。Clause 21C. The apparatus of clause 20C, wherein to determine the direction, the one or more processors are also configured to assign one of the 56 values to the direction.

條款22C. 根據條款17C-21C中任一項所述的設備,其中第一組濾波器包括9x9菱形濾波器。Clause 22C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-21C, wherein the first set of filters comprises 9x9 diamond filters.

條款23C. 根據條款17C-22C中任一項所述的設備,其中為了基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值來決定經濾波的重建取樣,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為將第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值添加到重建取樣。Clause 23C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-22C, wherein for determining the filtered reconstructed samples based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value, the one or more processors also is configured to add the first sample modification value and the second sample modification value to the reconstructed samples.

條款24C. 根據條款17C-23C中任一項所述的設備,其中為了基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:修剪第二取樣修改值以決定經修剪的取樣修改值,以及,將第一取樣修改值和經修剪的取樣修改值添加到重建取樣。Clause 24C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-23C, wherein to determine the second sampling modification value based on the first intermediate sampling value, the one or more processors are also configured to: trim the second sampling modification value to determine the trimmed sample modification value, and add the first sample modification value and the trimmed sample modification value to the reconstructed sample.

條款25C. 根據條款24C所述的設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:在視訊資料中接收經修剪的取樣修改值。Clause 25C. The apparatus of clause 24C, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to receive trimmed sample modification values in the video data.

條款26C. 根據條款17C-25C中任一項所述的設備,其中為了基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為決定在重建取樣與第一中間取樣值之間的差。Clause 26C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-25C, wherein to determine the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value, the one or more processors are also configured to determine between the reconstruction samples and the first sample modification value. A difference between intermediate sample values.

條款27C. 根據條款17C-26C中任一項所述的設備,其中一或多個處理器亦被配置為:基於用於重建的量化參數從複數組固定濾波器中選擇第一組濾波器堵塞。Clause 27C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-26C, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: select the first set of filter blockers from the complex set of fixed filters based on the quantization parameter for reconstruction .

條款28C. 根據條款 17C-27C 中任一項所述的設備,其中為了應用第一階段 ALF,一或多個處理器亦被配置為決定重建取樣的第三類別索引,基於以下條件從第二組濾波器中選擇第三濾波器第三類別索引,並將第二組濾波器中的第三濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第二中間取樣值;為了將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣,一或多個處理器亦被配置為基於第一中間取樣值和第二中間取樣值決定第二取樣修改值。Clause 28C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-27C, wherein to apply the first stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to determine a third class index of reconstruction samples, based on the following conditions: The third filter class index of the third filter is selected from the set of filters, and the third filter of the second set of filters is applied to the reconstructed samples to determine the second intermediate sample value; in order to apply the second-stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, The one or more processors are also configured to determine a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value and the second intermediate sample value.

條款29C. 根據條款17C-28C中任一項所述的設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:將預測取樣值添加到殘差取樣值以決定重建取樣。Clause 29C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-28C, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: add prediction samples to residual samples to determine reconstruction samples.

條款30C. 根據條款28C所述的設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:將去塊濾波器應用於預測取樣值和殘差取樣值之和以決定重建取樣。Clause 30C. The apparatus of clause 28C, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: apply a deblocking filter to the sum of the prediction samples and the residual samples to determine the reconstructed samples.

條款31C. 根據條款17C-30C中的任一項所述的設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:輸出該視訊資料的解碼圖片,其中該解碼圖片包括經濾波的重建取樣。Clause 31C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-30C, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: output a decoded picture of the video data, wherein the decoded picture includes filtered reconstructed samples.

條款32C. 根據條款17C-31C中任一項所述的設備,其中該設備包括視訊編碼設備。Clause 32C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-31C, wherein the apparatus comprises a video encoding apparatus.

條款33C. 根據條款17C-32C中的任一項所述的設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:輸出該視訊資料的解碼圖片,其中該解碼圖片包括經濾波的重建取樣。Clause 33C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-32C, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: output a decoded picture of the video data, wherein the decoded picture includes filtered reconstructed samples.

條款34C. 根據條款33C所述的設備,其中該設備包括無線通訊設備,亦包括被配置為接收經編碼視訊資料的接收器。Clause 34C. The apparatus of Clause 33C, wherein the apparatus comprises a wireless communication device and also includes a receiver configured to receive encoded video data.

條款35C. 根據條款34C所述的設備,其中無線通訊設備包括電話手機,並且其中該接收器被配置為根據無線通訊標準來解調包括經編碼視訊資料的訊號。Clause 35C. The apparatus of clause 34C, wherein the wireless communication device comprises a telephone handset, and wherein the receiver is configured to demodulate a signal comprising encoded video material according to a wireless communication standard.

條款36C. 根據條款17C-35C中的任一項所述的設備,亦包括:顯示器,其被配置為顯示經解碼的視訊資料。Clause 36C. The apparatus of any of Clauses 17C-35C, further comprising: a display configured to display the decoded video material.

條款37C. 根據條款17C-36C中任一項所述的設備,其中該設備包括以下各項中的一項或多項:相機、電腦、行動設備、廣播接收器設備或機上盒。Clause 37C. The device of any of Clauses 17C-36C, wherein the device comprises one or more of the following: a camera, a computer, a mobile device, a broadcast receiver device, or a set-top box.

條款38C. 根據條款17C-37C中任一項所述的設備,其中該設備包括視訊編碼設備。Clause 38C. The apparatus of any of clauses 17C-37C, wherein the apparatus comprises a video encoding apparatus.

條款39C. 一種儲存指令的電腦可讀取儲存媒體,該等指令當由一或多個處理器執行時使該一或多個處理器用於:將第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF)應用於重建塊的重建取樣,其中為了應用第一階段ALF,一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的第一類別索引;基於第一類別索引,從第一組濾波器中選擇濾波器;及,將來自第一組濾波器的濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一中間取樣值;將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣,其中為了應用第二階段ALF,一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的第二類別索引;基於第二類別索引,從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器;將第二濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一取樣修改值;基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值;及,基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值,來決定經濾波的重建取樣。Clause 39C. A computer-readable storage medium storing instructions that, when executed by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to: apply a first-stage self-adjusting loop filter (ALF) Reconstruction samples in the reconstruction block, wherein in order to apply the first stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determine a first class index for the reconstructed samples; based on the first class index, from the first set of filters selecting a filter; and applying a filter from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine a first intermediate sample value; applying a second stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, wherein to apply the second stage ALF, one or more The processor is also configured to: determine a second class index for the reconstructed samples; select a second filter from the second set of filters based on the second class index; apply the second filter to the reconstructed samples to determine the first a sample modification value; a second sample modification value is determined based on the first intermediate sample value; and a filtered reconstructed sample is determined based on the reconstructed sample, the first sample modification value and the second sample modification value.

條款1D. 一種對視訊資料進行解碼的方法,該方法包括:將第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF)應用於重建塊的重建取樣,其中應用第一階段ALF包括:決定用於重建取樣的第一類別索引;基於第一類別索引,從第一組濾波器中選擇濾波器;及,將來自第一組濾波器的濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一中間取樣值;將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣,其中應用第二階段ALF包括:決定用於重建取樣的第二類別索引;基於第二類別索引,從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器;將第二濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一取樣修改值;基於第一中間取樣值,來決定第二取樣修改值;及,基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值,來決定經濾波的重建取樣。Clause 1D. A method of decoding video data, the method comprising: applying a first-stage self-adjusting loop filter (ALF) to reconstructed samples of a reconstruction block, wherein applying the first-stage ALF comprises: determining a a first class index; selecting a filter from the first set of filters based on the first class index; and applying a filter from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine the first intermediate sample value; applying the second stage ALF is applied to reconstructed samples, wherein applying the second-stage ALF includes: determining a second class index for reconstructing samples; selecting a second filter from a second set of filters based on the second class index; applying the second filter determining a first sample modification value based on the reconstructed samples; determining a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value; and determining a filtered reconstruction based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value sampling.

條款2D. 根據條款1D所述的方法,其中第一組濾波器包括固定濾波器。Clause 2D. The method of Clause ID, wherein the first set of filters comprises fixed filters.

條款3D. 根據條款1D所述的方法,其中第二組濾波器包括:基於在視訊資料中用訊號發送的語法而被決定的用訊號發送的濾波器。Clause 3D. The method of Clause ID, wherein the second set of filters comprises: signaled filters determined based on a syntax signaled in the video data.

條款4D. 根據條款1D所述的方法,其中決定第一類別索引包括:決定用於重建取樣的活動值;決定用於重建取樣的方向;及,基於活動值和方向,來決定第一類別索引。Clause 4D. The method of Clause ID, wherein determining the first class index comprises: determining an activity value for reconstructing sampling; determining a direction for reconstructing sampling; and, based on the activity value and the direction, determining the first class index .

條款5D. 根據條款4D所述的方法,其中決定方向包括:將56個值之一分配給方向。Clause 5D. The method of Clause 4D, wherein determining the direction comprises assigning one of 56 values to the direction.

條款6D. 根據條款1D所述的方法,其中第一組濾波器包括9x9菱形濾波器。Clause 6D. The method of Clause ID, wherein the first set of filters comprises 9x9 diamond filters.

條款7D. 根據條款1D所述的方法,其中基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值來決定經濾波的重建取樣包括:將第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值添加到重建取樣。Clause 7D. The method of Clause ID, wherein determining the filtered reconstructed sample based on the reconstructed sample, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value comprises adding the first sample modification value and the second sample modification value to a Rebuild sampling.

條款8D. 根據第1D條所述的方法,其中基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值包括:修剪第二取樣修改值以決定經修剪的取樣修改值,以及,將第一取樣修改值和經修剪的取樣修改值添加到重建取樣。Clause 8D. The method of Clause 1D, wherein determining the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value comprises trimming the second sample modification value to determine a trimmed sample modification value, and modifying the first sample modification The value and the trimmed sample modification value are added to the reconstructed sample.

條款9D. 根據條款8D所述的方法,亦包括:在視訊資料中接收經修剪的取樣修改值。Clause 9D. The method of Clause 8D, further comprising: receiving a trimmed sample modification value in the video data.

條款10D. 根據條款1D所述的方法,其中基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值包括:決定重建取樣和第一中間取樣值之間的差。Clause 10D. The method of Clause ID, wherein determining the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value comprises determining a difference between the reconstructed sample and the first intermediate sample value.

條款11D. 根據條款1D所述的方法,亦包括:基於用於重建塊的量化參數,從複數組固定濾波器中選擇第一組濾波器。Clause 11D. The method of Clause ID, further comprising: selecting the first set of filters from the complex set of fixed filters based on quantization parameters for the reconstructed block.

條款12D. 根據條款1D所述的方法,其中應用第一階段ALF亦包括:決定用於重建取樣的第三類別索引;基於第三類別索引,從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器;及,將來自第二組濾波器的第二濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第二中間取樣值;及,將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣亦包括:基於第一中間取樣值和第二中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值。Clause 12D. The method of Clause ID, wherein applying the first stage ALF also comprises: determining a third class index for reconstructing samples; selecting a second filter from the second set of filters based on the third class index; and, applying the second filter from the second set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine the second intermediate sample value; and, applying the second stage ALF to the reconstructed sample also includes: based on the first intermediate sample value and the second intermediate sample value The sample value determines the second sample modification value.

條款13D. 根據條款1D所述的方法,亦包括:將預測取樣值與殘差取樣值相加,以決定重建取樣。Clause 13D. The method of Clause ID, further comprising: adding the prediction samples and the residual samples to determine the reconstruction samples.

條款14D. 根據條款13D所述的方法,亦包括:將去塊濾波器應用於預測取樣值和殘差取樣值之和,以決定重建取樣。Clause 14D. The method of Clause 13D, further comprising applying a deblocking filter to the sum of the prediction samples and the residual samples to determine the reconstructed samples.

條款15D. 根據條款1D所述的方法,亦包括:輸出該視訊資料的解碼圖片,其中該解碼圖片包括經濾波的重建取樣。Clause 15D. The method of Clause ID, further comprising: outputting a decoded picture of the video data, wherein the decoded picture includes filtered reconstructed samples.

條款16D. 根據條款1D所述的方法,其中該解碼方法是作為視訊編碼程序的一部分而被執行的。Clause 16D. The method of Clause ID, wherein the decoding method is performed as part of a video encoding procedure.

條款17D. 一種對視訊資料進行解碼的設備,該設備包括:記憶體,被配置為儲存視訊資料;在電路中實施並且被配置為以下操作的一或多個處理器:將第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF)應用於重建塊的重建取樣,其中為了應用第一階段ALF,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的第一類別索引;基於第一類別索引,從第一組濾波器中選擇濾波器;及,將來自第一組濾波器的濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一中間取樣值;將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣,其中為了應用第二階段ALF,一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的第二類別索引;基於第二類別索引,從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器;將第二濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一取樣修改值;基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值;及,基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值來決定經濾波的重建取樣。Clause 17D. An apparatus for decoding video data, the apparatus comprising: memory configured to store video data; one or more processors implemented in circuitry and configured to: self-adjust the first stage An in-loop filter (ALF) is applied to the reconstructed samples of the reconstructed block, wherein in order to apply the first stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determine a first class index for the reconstructed samples; based on the first class index , selecting filters from the first set of filters; and, applying filters from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine the first intermediate sample value; applying a second-stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, wherein in order to apply the first intermediate sample value In a two-stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determine a second class index for reconstructing samples; select a second filter from a second set of filters based on the second class index; apply to reconstructed samples to determine a first sample modification value; determine a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value; and determine a filtered reconstructed sample based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value .

條款18D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中第一組濾波器包括固定濾波器。Clause 18D. The apparatus of clause 17D, wherein the first set of filters comprises fixed filters.

條款19D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中第二組濾波器包括基於在視訊資料中用訊號發送的語法而被決定的用訊號發送的濾波器。Clause 19D. The apparatus of clause 17D, wherein the second set of filters comprises signaled filters determined based on a syntax of the signaled in the video data.

條款20D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中為了決定第一類別索引,一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的活動值;決定用於重建取樣的方向;及,基於活動值和方向來決定第一類別索引。Clause 20D. The apparatus of clause 17D, wherein to determine the first class index, the one or more processors are also configured to: determine an activity value for reconstructing sampling; determine a direction for reconstructing sampling; and, based on Activity value and direction to determine the first category index.

條款21D. 根據條款20D所述的設備,其中為了決定方向,一或多個處理器亦被配置為將56個值之一分配給方向。Clause 21D. The apparatus of clause 20D, wherein to determine the direction, the one or more processors are also configured to assign one of the 56 values to the direction.

條款22D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中第一組濾波器包括9x9菱形濾波器。Clause 22D. The apparatus of Clause 17D, wherein the first set of filters comprises 9x9 diamond filters.

條款23D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中為了基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值來決定經濾波的重建取樣,一或多個處理器亦被配置為:將第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值添加到重建取樣。Clause 23D. The apparatus of clause 17D, wherein to determine the filtered reconstructed samples based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value, the one or more processors are also configured to: convert the first The sample modification value and the second sample modification value are added to the reconstructed samples.

條款24D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中為了基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值,一或多個處理器亦被配置為:修剪第二取樣修改值以決定經修剪的取樣修改值,以及,將第一取樣修改值和經修剪的取樣修改值添加到重建取樣。Clause 24D. The apparatus of clause 17D, wherein to determine the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value, the one or more processors are also configured to: trim the second sample modification value to determine the trimmed sample The modification value, and the first sample modification value and the trimmed sample modification value are added to the reconstructed samples.

條款25D. 根據條款24D所述的設備,其中一或多個處理器亦被配置為:在視訊資料中接收經修剪的取樣修改值。Clause 25D. The apparatus of clause 24D, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: receive the trimmed sample modification values in the video data.

條款26D . 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中為了基於第一中間取樣值決定第二取樣修改值,一或多個處理器亦被配置為決定重建取樣和第一中間取樣值之間的差。Clause 26D. The apparatus of clause 17D, wherein to determine the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value, the one or more processors are also configured to determine a difference between the reconstructed sample and the first intermediate sample value.

條款27D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中一或多個處理器亦被配置為:基於用於重建塊的量化參數,從複數組固定濾波器中選擇第一組濾波器。Clause 27D. The apparatus of clause 17D, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to: select the first set of filters from the complex set of fixed filters based on quantization parameters used to reconstruct the block.

條款28D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中為了應用第一階段ALF,一或多個處理器亦被配置:為了決定用於重建取樣的第三類別索引,基於第三類別索引從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器,以及,將來自第二組濾波器的第二濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第二中間取樣值;為了將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣,一或多個處理器亦被配置為基於第一中間取樣值和第二中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值。Clause 28D. The apparatus of Clause 17D, wherein to apply the first stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured: to determine a third class index for reconstructing the sample, from the second set of indices based on the third class index selecting a second filter among the filters, and applying a second filter from the second set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine a second intermediate sample value; to apply the second stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, one or more The processor is also configured to determine a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value and the second intermediate sample value.

條款29D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:將預測取樣值與殘差取樣值相加以決定重建取樣。Clause 29D. The apparatus of Clause 17D, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: add the prediction samples and the residual samples to determine the reconstruction samples.

條款30D. 根據條款28D所述的設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:將去塊濾波器應用於預測取樣值和殘差取樣值之和,以決定重建取樣。Clause 30D. The apparatus of Clause 28D, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: apply a deblocking filter to the sum of the predicted samples and the residual samples to determine the reconstructed samples.

條款31D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:輸出該視訊資料的解碼圖片,其中該解碼圖片包括經濾波的重建取樣。Clause 31D. The apparatus of clause 17D, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: output a decoded picture of the video data, wherein the decoded picture includes filtered reconstructed samples.

條款32D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中該設備包括視訊編碼設備。Clause 32D. The apparatus of clause 17D, wherein the apparatus comprises a video encoding apparatus.

條款33D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:輸出該視訊資料的解碼圖片,其中該解碼圖片包括經濾波的重建取樣。Clause 33D. The apparatus of Clause 17D, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: output a decoded picture of the video data, wherein the decoded picture includes filtered reconstructed samples.

條款34D. 根據條款33D所述的設備,其中該設備包括無線通訊設備,亦包括:被配置為接收經編碼的視訊資料的接收器。Clause 34D. The apparatus of Clause 33D, wherein the apparatus comprises a wireless communication device, further comprising: a receiver configured to receive the encoded video data.

條款35D. 根據條款34D所述的設備,其中無線通訊設備包括電話手機,並且其中接收器被配置為根據無線通訊標準來解調包括經編碼的視訊資料的訊號。Clause 35D. The apparatus of Clause 34D, wherein the wireless communication device comprises a telephone handset, and wherein the receiver is configured to demodulate the signal comprising the encoded video material according to a wireless communication standard.

條款36D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,亦包括:顯示器,被配置為顯示經解碼的視訊資料。Clause 36D. The apparatus of clause 17D, further comprising: a display configured to display the decoded video data.

條款37D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中該設備包括以下各項中的一項或多項:相機、電腦、行動設備、廣播接收器設備或機上盒。Clause 37D. The device of Clause 17D, wherein the device comprises one or more of the following: a camera, a computer, a mobile device, a broadcast receiver device, or a set-top box.

條款38D. 根據條款17D所述的設備,其中該設備包括視訊編碼設備。Clause 38D. The apparatus of clause 17D, wherein the apparatus comprises a video encoding apparatus.

條款39D. 一種儲存指令的電腦可讀取儲存媒體,該等指令當由一或多個處理器執行時使得一或多個處理器用於:將第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF)應用於重建塊的重建取樣,其中為了應用第一階段ALF,一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的第一類別索引;基於第一類別索引從第一組濾波器中選擇濾波器;及,將來自第一組濾波器的濾波器應用於重建取樣,以決定第一中間取樣值;將第二階段ALF應用於重建取樣,其中為了應用第二階段ALF,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於重建取樣的第二類別索引;基於第二類別索引,從第二組濾波器中選擇第二濾波器;將第二濾波器應用於重建取樣以決定第一取樣修改值;基於第一中間取樣值來決定第二取樣修改值;及,基於重建取樣、第一取樣修改值和第二取樣修改值,來決定經濾波的重建取樣。Clause 39D. A computer-readable storage medium storing instructions that, when executed by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to: apply a first-stage self-adjusting loop filter (ALF) to reconstructed samples of the reconstructed block, wherein to apply the first stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determine a first class index for the reconstructed samples; select a filter from a first set of filters based on the first class index and, applying filters from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine a first intermediate sample value; applying a second stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, wherein in order to apply the second stage ALF, the one or more The processor is also configured to: determine a second class index for the reconstructed samples; select a second filter from the second set of filters based on the second class index; apply the second filter to the reconstructed samples to determine the first a sample modification value; a second sample modification value is determined based on the first intermediate sample value; and a filtered reconstructed sample is determined based on the reconstructed sample, the first sample modification value and the second sample modification value.

要認識到,依據實例,本文描述的任何技術的某些動作或事件可以以不同的循序執行,可以被添加、合併或完全省略(例如,並非所有描述的動作或事件是對於實施該技術皆是必要的)。此外,在某些實例中,動作或事件可以例如經由多執行緒處理、中斷處理或多個處理器併發地而不是順序地執行。It is recognized that, by way of example, certain acts or events of any of the techniques described herein may be performed in a different order, may be added, combined, or omitted entirely (eg, not all described acts or events are necessary for implementing the techniques). necessary). Furthermore, in some instances, actions or events may be performed concurrently rather than sequentially, eg, via multi-threaded processing, interrupt processing, or multiple processors.

在一或多個實例中,所描述的功能可以用硬體、軟體、韌體或其任何組合來實現。若用軟體來實現,則該等功能可以作為一或多個指令或代碼儲存在電腦可讀取媒體上或者經由其進行傳輸並且由基於硬體的處理單元執行。電腦可讀取媒體可以包括電腦可讀取儲存媒體,其對應於諸如資料儲存媒體之類的有形媒體或者通訊媒體,該通訊媒體包括例如根據通訊協定來促進電腦程式從一個地方傳送到另一個地方的任何媒體。以這種方式,電腦可讀取媒體通常可以對應於(1)非暫時性的有形電腦可讀取儲存媒體、或者(2)諸如訊號或載波之類的通訊媒體。資料儲存媒體可以是可以由一或多個電腦或者一或多個處理器存取以取得用於實現在本案內容中描述的技術的指令、代碼及/或資料結構的任何可用的媒體。電腦程式產品可以包括電腦可讀取媒體。In one or more examples, the functions described can be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, the functions may be stored on or transmitted over as one or more instructions or code on a computer-readable medium and executed by a hardware-based processing unit. Computer-readable media may include computer-readable storage media, which correspond to tangible media, such as data storage media, or communication media, including facilitating transfer of computer programs from one place to another, for example, in accordance with communication protocols of any media. In this manner, computer-readable media may generally correspond to (1) non-transitory tangible computer-readable storage media, or (2) communication media such as a signal or carrier wave. Data storage media can be any available media that can be accessed by one or more computers or one or more processors to obtain instructions, code and/or data structures for implementing the techniques described in this context. The computer program product may include a computer-readable medium.

舉例而言而非進行限制,此類電腦可讀取儲存媒體可以包括RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM或其他光碟儲存、磁碟儲存或其他磁存放裝置、快閃記憶體、或者能夠用於以指令或資料結構形式儲存期望的程式碼以及能夠由電腦存取的任何其他媒體。此外,任何連接被適當地稱為電腦可讀取媒體。例如,若使用同軸電纜、光纖光纜、雙絞線、數位用戶線路(DSL)或者無線技術(例如,紅外線、無線電和微波)從網站、伺服器或其他遠端源傳輸指令,則同軸電纜、光纖光纜、雙絞線、DSL或者無線技術(例如,紅外線、無線電和微波)被包括在媒體的定義中。然而,應當理解的是,電腦可讀取儲存媒體和資料儲存媒體不包括連接、載波、訊號或其他臨時性媒體,而是替代地針對非臨時性的有形儲存媒體。如本文所使用的,磁碟和光碟包括壓縮光碟(CD)、鐳射光碟、光碟、數位多功能光碟(DVD)、軟碟和藍光光碟,其中磁碟通常磁性地複製資料,而光碟利用鐳射來光學地複製資料。上述各項的組合亦應當被包括在電腦可讀取媒體的範疇之內。By way of example and not limitation, such computer-readable storage media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage, flash memory, or capable of Store the desired code in the form of instructions or data structures and any other medium that can be accessed by the computer. Also, any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium. For example, if coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technologies (eg, infrared, radio, and microwave) are used to transmit commands from a website, server, or other remote source, coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, or Fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies (eg, infrared, radio, and microwave) are included in the definition of media. It should be understood, however, that computer-readable storage media and data storage media do not include connections, carrier waves, signals, or other transitory media, but are instead directed to non-transitory, tangible storage media. As used herein, magnetic and optical discs include compact discs (CDs), laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs (DVDs), floppy discs, and blu-ray discs, where magnetic discs generally reproduce data magnetically, while optical discs use lasers to reproduce data Optically reproduce material. Combinations of the above should also be included within the scope of computer-readable media.

指令可以由一或多個處理器來執行,諸如一或多個DSP、通用微處理器、ASIC、FPGA、或其他等效的整合或個別邏輯電路。因此,如本文所使用的術語「處理器」和「處理電路」可以代表前述結構中的任何一者或者適於實現本文描述的技術的任何其他結構。另外,在一些態樣中,本文描述的功能可以在被配置用於編碼和解碼的專用硬體及/或軟體模組內提供,或者被併入經組合的轉碼器中。此外,該等技術可以完全在一或多個電路或邏輯元件中實現。Instructions may be executed by one or more processors, such as one or more DSPs, general purpose microprocessors, ASICs, FPGAs, or other equivalent integrated or individual logic circuits. Accordingly, the terms "processor" and "processing circuit" as used herein may represent any of the foregoing structures or any other structure suitable for implementing the techniques described herein. Additionally, in some aspects, the functionality described herein may be provided within dedicated hardware and/or software modules configured for encoding and decoding, or incorporated into a combined transcoder. Furthermore, the techniques may be implemented entirely in one or more circuits or logic elements.

本案內容的技術可以在多種多樣的設備或裝置中實現,包括無線手機、積體電路(IC)或一組IC(例如,晶片組)。在本案內容中描述了各種部件、模組或單元以強調被配置為執行所揭示的技術的設備的功能性態樣,但是不一定需要經由不同的硬體單元來實現。確切而言,如前述,各種單元可以被組合在轉碼器硬體單元中,或者由可交互動操作的硬體單元的集合(包括如前述的一或多個處理器)結合適當的軟體及/或韌體來提供。The techniques disclosed herein can be implemented in a wide variety of devices or devices, including a wireless handset, an integrated circuit (IC), or a set of ICs (eg, a chip set). Various components, modules, or units are described in this context to emphasize functional aspects of devices configured to perform the disclosed techniques, but do not necessarily require implementation via distinct hardware units. Rather, various units may be combined in a transcoder hardware unit, as previously described, or by a collection of interoperable hardware units (including one or more processors as previously described) in combination with appropriate software and / or firmware provided.

已經描述了各個實例。這些和其他實例在所附的請求項的範疇內。Various examples have been described. These and other examples are within the scope of the appended claims.

100:系統 102:源設備 104:視訊源 106:記憶體 108:輸出介面 110:電腦可讀取媒體 112:存放裝置 114:檔案伺服器 116:目的地設備 118:顯示設備 120:記憶體 122:輸入介面 140:濾波器 142:濾波器 150:子塊 160:塊 162:塊 164:塊 166:塊 170:網格 180:濾波器 182:濾波器 184:濾波器 190:濾波器 192:VB 200:視訊轉碼器 202:模式選擇單元 204:殘差產生單元 206:變換處理單元 208:量化單元 210:逆量化單元 212:逆變換處理單元 214:重建單元 216:濾波器單元 218:DPB 220:熵編碼單元 222:運動估計單元 224:運動補償單元 226:訊框內預測單元 230:視訊資料記憶體 300:視訊解碼器 302:熵解碼單元 304:預測處理單元 306:逆量化單元 308:逆變換處理單元 310:重建單元 312:濾波器單元 314:DPB 316:運動補償單元 318:訊框內預測單元 320:經譯碼圖片緩衝器(CPB)記憶體 342:解塊濾波器 344:SAO濾波器 346:ALF單元 400:第一階段ALF 410:第二階段ALF 430:濾波取樣 510:濾波器 520:濾波器 530:濾波器 540:濾波器 542:第二階段ALF 550:濾波器 560:濾波器 562:濾波器 564:濾波器 566:濾波器 568:濾波器 570:濾波器 572:濾波器 574:濾波器 576:濾波器 578:濾波器 580:第一階段 582:第二階段 584:第一階段ALF 586:第二ALF階段 588:濾波取樣 650:方塊 652:方塊 654:方塊 656:方塊 658:方塊 660:方塊 670:方塊 672:方塊 674:方塊 676:方塊 678:方塊 680:方塊 710:方塊 712:方塊 714:方塊 716:方塊 720:方塊 722:方塊 724:方塊 726:方塊 730:方塊 D1:梯度 D2:梯度 H:水平梯度 V:垂直梯度 100: System 102: Source Device 104: Video source 106: Memory 108: Output interface 110: Computer-readable media 112: Storage device 114: file server 116: destination device 118: Display device 120: memory 122: Input interface 140: Filter 142: Filter 150: Subblock 160: block 162: block 164:block 166: block 170: Grid 180: Filter 182: Filter 184: Filter 190: Filter 192:VB 200: Video Transcoder 202: Mode selection unit 204: Residual generation unit 206: Transform processing unit 208: Quantization unit 210: Inverse Quantization Unit 212: Inverse transform processing unit 214: Rebuild Unit 216: Filter unit 218: DPB 220: Entropy coding unit 222: Motion Estimation Unit 224: Motion Compensation Unit 226: In-frame prediction unit 230: Video data memory 300: Video Decoder 302: Entropy decoding unit 304: Prediction Processing Unit 306: Inverse Quantization Unit 308: Inverse transform processing unit 310: Rebuild Unit 312: Filter unit 314: DPB 316: Motion Compensation Unit 318: In-frame prediction unit 320: Coded Picture Buffer (CPB) memory 342: Deblocking Filter 344: SAO filter 346: ALF unit 400: Phase 1 ALF 410: Second Stage ALF 430: Filter sampling 510: Filter 520: Filter 530: Filter 540: Filter 542: Second Stage ALF 550: Filter 560: Filter 562: Filter 564: Filter 566: Filter 568: Filter 570: Filter 572: Filter 574: Filter 576: Filter 578: Filter 580: Phase 1 582: Stage Two 584: Phase 1 ALF 586: Second ALF Stage 588: Filter sampling 650: Square 652: Square 654: Square 656: Square 658: Square 660: Square 670: Square 672: Square 674: Square 676: Square 678: Square 680: Square 710: Blocks 712: Square 714: Square 716: Square 720: Square 722: Square 724: Square 726: Square 730: Square D1: Gradient D2: Gradient H: horizontal gradient V: vertical gradient

圖1是示出可執行本案內容的技術的實例視訊編碼和解碼系統的方塊圖。1 is a block diagram illustrating an example video encoding and decoding system that may implement the techniques of the present disclosure.

圖2A和圖2B是示出可以根據本案內容的技術使用的實例自我調整迴路濾波器形狀的概念圖。2A and 2B are conceptual diagrams illustrating example self-tuning loop filter shapes that may be used in accordance with the techniques disclosed in this patent.

圖3是示出可以根據本案內容的技術使用的用於4x4子塊自我調整迴路濾波器分類的實例子取樣拉普拉斯值的概念圖。3 is a conceptual diagram illustrating example sub-sampled Laplacian values for 4x4 sub-block self-tuning loop filter classification that may be used in accordance with the techniques disclosed herein.

圖4是示出可以根據本案內容的技術使用的用於亮度取樣的實例拉普拉斯值的概念圖。4 is a conceptual diagram illustrating example Laplacian values for luma sampling that may be used in accordance with the techniques of this disclosure.

圖5為示出可以根據本案內容的技術使用的自我調整迴路濾波器類別合併的實例的概念圖。5 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example of self-tuning loop filter class merging that may be used in accordance with the techniques of this disclosure.

圖6是示出可以根據本案內容的技術使用的7x7菱形濾波器形狀的實例幾何變換的概念圖。6 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example geometric transformation of a 7x7 diamond filter shape that may be used in accordance with the techniques of the present disclosure.

圖7A-圖7C示出可以根據本案內容的技術使用的ALF中的對稱取樣填充的實例。7A-7C illustrate an example of symmetric sampling padding in an ALF that may be used in accordance with the techniques of the present disclosure.

圖8示出可以根據本案內容的技術使用的ALF 4x4子塊分類的實例。Figure 8 shows an example of an ALF 4x4 sub-block classification that may be used in accordance with the techniques disclosed in this case.

圖9示出可以根據本案內容的技術使用多個固定濾波器組和多個用訊號發送的濾波器組來對視訊資料的重建取樣進行濾波的實例框架。9 illustrates an example framework in which reconstructed samples of video data may be filtered using multiple fixed filter banks and multiple signaled filter banks in accordance with the techniques disclosed herein.

圖10A-圖10E示出可以根據本案內容的技術使用的5x5、7x7、9x9、11x11和13x13濾波器的實例。10A-10E illustrate examples of 5x5, 7x7, 9x9, 11x11, and 13x13 filters that may be used in accordance with the techniques disclosed in this case.

圖11示出可以根據本案內容的技術用一個用訊號發送的濾波器實現多個固定濾波器的實例。11 illustrates an example of multiple fixed filters that can be implemented with one signaled filter in accordance with the techniques disclosed in this application.

圖12A-圖12E示出可以根據本案內容的技術使用的兩部分濾波器的實例。12A-12E illustrate examples of two-part filters that may be used in accordance with the techniques disclosed in this application.

圖13和圖14是示出可以根據本案內容的技術的示例性ALF框架的概念圖。13 and 14 are conceptual diagrams illustrating exemplary ALF frameworks that may be in accordance with techniques disclosed in this patent.

圖15是示出可以執行本案內容的技術的示例性視訊轉碼器的方塊圖。15 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary video transcoder that may perform the techniques of the present disclosure.

圖16是示出可以執行本案內容的技術的示例性視訊解碼器的方塊圖。16 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary video decoder that may perform the techniques of the present disclosure.

圖17是示出用於執行本案內容的技術的示例性濾波器單元的方塊圖。17 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary filter unit for implementing the techniques of this disclosure.

圖18是示出根據本案內容的技術的用於對當前塊進行編碼的示例性程序的流程圖。18 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure for encoding a current block in accordance with the techniques of this disclosure.

圖19是示出根據本案內容的技術的用於對當前塊進行解碼的示例性程序的流程圖。19 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure for decoding a current block in accordance with the techniques of this disclosure.

圖20是示出根據本案內容的技術的用於對當前塊進行解碼的示例性程序的流程圖。20 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure for decoding a current block in accordance with the techniques of this disclosure.

國內寄存資訊(請依寄存機構、日期、號碼順序註記) 無 國外寄存資訊(請依寄存國家、機構、日期、號碼順序註記) 無 Domestic storage information (please note in the order of storage institution, date and number) none Foreign deposit information (please note in the order of deposit country, institution, date and number) none

540:濾波器 540: Filter

542:第二階段ALF 542: Second Stage ALF

Claims (38)

一種對視訊資料進行解碼的方法,該方法包括以下步驟: 向一重建塊的一重建取樣應用一第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF),其中應用該第一階段ALF包括以下步驟: 決定用於該重建取樣的一第一類別索引; 基於該第一類別索引,從一第一組濾波器中選擇一濾波器;及 向該重建取樣應用來自該第一組濾波器的該濾波器,以決定一第一中間取樣值; 向該重建取樣應用一第二階段ALF,其中應用該第二階段ALF包括以下步驟: 決定用於該重建取樣的一第二類別索引; 基於該第二類別索引,從一第二組濾波器中選擇一第二濾波器; 向該重建取樣應用該第二濾波器,以決定一第一取樣修改值; 基於該第一中間取樣值,來決定一第二取樣修改值;及 基於該重建取樣、該第一取樣修改值和該第二取樣修改值,來決定一經濾波的重建取樣。 A method for decoding video information, the method comprising the following steps: A first-stage self-adjusting loop filter (ALF) is applied to a reconstructed sample of a reconstruction block, wherein applying the first-stage ALF includes the following steps: determining a first class index for the reconstructed sample; selecting a filter from a first set of filters based on the first class index; and applying the filter from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine a first intermediate sample value; Applying a second-stage ALF to the reconstructed sample, wherein applying the second-stage ALF includes the following steps: determining a second class index for the reconstructed sample; selecting a second filter from a second set of filters based on the second class index; applying the second filter to the reconstructed samples to determine a first sample modification value; determining a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value; and Based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value, a filtered reconstructed sample is determined. 根據請求項1之方法,其中該第一組濾波器包括固定濾波器。The method of claim 1, wherein the first set of filters comprises fixed filters. 根據請求項1之方法,其中該第二組濾波器包括以下步驟:基於在該視訊資料中用訊號發送的語法而被決定的用訊號發送的濾波器。The method of claim 1, wherein the second set of filters includes the steps of: signaling filters determined based on a signaling syntax in the video data. 根據請求項1之方法,其中決定該第一類別索引包括以下步驟: 決定用於該重建取樣的一活動值; 決定用於該重建取樣的一方向;及 基於該活動值和該方向,來決定該第一類別索引。 The method of claim 1, wherein determining the first category index comprises the steps of: determining an activity value for the reconstructed sampling; determine a direction to use for the reconstruction sampling; and Based on the activity value and the direction, the first category index is determined. 根據請求項4之方法,其中決定該方向包括:將56個值之一分配給該方向。The method of claim 4, wherein determining the direction comprises assigning one of 56 values to the direction. 根據請求項1之方法,其中該第一組濾波器包括一9×9菱形濾波器。The method of claim 1, wherein the first set of filters includes a 9x9 diamond filter. 根據請求項1之方法,其中基於該重建取樣、該第一取樣修改值和該第二取樣修改值來決定該經濾波的重建取樣包括以下步驟:將該第一取樣修改值和該第二取樣修改值添加到該重建取樣。The method of claim 1, wherein determining the filtered reconstructed sample based on the reconstructed sample, the first sample modification value and the second sample modification value comprises the steps of: the first sample modification value and the second sample Modified values are added to the reconstructed sample. 根據請求項1之方法,其中基於該第一中間取樣值來決定該第二取樣修改值包括以下步驟:修剪該第二取樣修改值以決定一經修剪的取樣修改值,以及將該第一取樣修改值和該經修剪的取樣修改值相加到該重建取樣。The method of claim 1, wherein determining the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value comprises the steps of trimming the second sample modification value to determine a trimmed sample modification value, and modifying the first sample modification The value and the trimmed sample modification value are added to the reconstructed sample. 根據請求項8之方法,亦包括以下步驟: 在該視訊資料中接收該經修剪的取樣修改值。 According to the method of claim 8, it also includes the following steps: The trimmed sample modification value is received in the video data. 根據請求項1之方法,其中基於該第一中間取樣值來決定該第二取樣修改值包括以下步驟:決定該重建取樣與該第一中間取樣值之間的一差。The method of claim 1, wherein determining the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value comprises the step of: determining a difference between the reconstructed sample and the first intermediate sample value. 根據請求項1之方法,亦包括以下步驟: 基於用於該重建塊的一量化參數,來從複數組固定濾波器中選擇該第一組濾波器。 According to the method of claim 1, the following steps are also included: The first set of filters is selected from the complex set of fixed filters based on a quantization parameter for the reconstructed block. 根據請求項1之方法,其中 應用該第一階段ALF亦包括以下步驟:決定用於該重建取樣的一第三類別索引,基於該第三類別索引從一第二組濾波器中選擇一第三濾波器,以及將來自該第二組濾波器的該第三濾波器應用於該重建取樣以決定一第二中間取樣值; 將該第二階段ALF應用於該重建取樣亦包括:基於該第一中間取樣值和該第二中間取樣值,來決定該第二取樣修改值。 The method according to claim 1, wherein Applying the first-stage ALF also includes the steps of: determining a third class index for the reconstructed sample, selecting a third filter from a second set of filters based on the third class index, and converting the The third filter of the two sets of filters is applied to the reconstructed samples to determine a second intermediate sample value; Applying the second-stage ALF to the reconstructed sample also includes determining the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value and the second intermediate sample value. 根據請求項1之方法,亦包括以下步驟: 將一預測取樣值與一殘差取樣值相加,以決定該重建取樣。 According to the method of claim 1, the following steps are also included: A prediction sample is added to a residual sample to determine the reconstructed sample. 根據請求項13之方法,亦包括以下步驟: 將一去塊濾波器應用於該預測取樣值和該殘差取樣值之一和,以決定該重建取樣。 According to the method of claim 13, the following steps are also included: A deblocking filter is applied to the sum of the prediction samples and the residual samples to determine the reconstructed samples. 根據請求項1之方法,亦包括以下步驟: 輸出該視訊資料的一解碼圖片,其中該解碼圖片包括該經濾波的重建取樣。 According to the method of claim 1, the following steps are also included: A decoded picture of the video data is output, wherein the decoded picture includes the filtered reconstructed samples. 根據請求項1之方法,其中該解碼的方法是作為一視訊編碼程序的一部分而被執行的。The method of claim 1, wherein the method of decoding is performed as part of a video encoding process. 一種用於對視訊資料進行解碼的設備,該設備包括: 一記憶體,其被配置為儲存視訊資料; 一或多個處理器,其在電路中實現並被配置為: 向一重建塊的一重建取樣應用一第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF),其中為了應用該第一階段ALF,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為: 決定用於該重建取樣的一第一類別索引; 基於該第一類別索引,從一第一組濾波器中選擇一濾波器;及 向該重建取樣應用來自該第一組濾波器的該濾波器,以決定一第一中間取樣值; 向該重建取樣應用一第二階段ALF,其中為了應用該第二階段ALF,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為: 決定用於該重建取樣的一第二類別索引; 基於該第二類別索引,從一第二組濾波器中選擇一第二濾波器; 向該重建取樣應用該第二濾波器,以決定一第一取樣修改值; 基於該第一中間取樣值,來決定一第二取樣修改值;及 基於該重建取樣、該第一取樣修改值和該第二取樣修改值,來決定一經濾波的重建取樣。 A device for decoding video information, the device includes: a memory configured to store video data; one or more processors implemented in circuitry and configured to: Applying a first-stage self-adjusting loop filter (ALF) to a reconstructed sample of a reconstruction block, wherein to apply the first-stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determining a first class index for the reconstructed sample; selecting a filter from a first set of filters based on the first class index; and applying the filter from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine a first intermediate sample value; Applying a second-stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, wherein to apply the second-stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determining a second class index for the reconstructed sample; selecting a second filter from a second set of filters based on the second class index; applying the second filter to the reconstructed samples to determine a first sample modification value; determining a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value; and Based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value, a filtered reconstructed sample is determined. 根據請求項17之設備,其中該第一組濾波器包括固定濾波器。The apparatus of claim 17, wherein the first set of filters comprises fixed filters. 根據請求項17之設備,其中該第二組濾波器包括:基於在該視訊資料中用訊號發送的語法而被決定的用訊號發送的濾波器。The apparatus of claim 17, wherein the second set of filters includes signaled filters determined based on a syntax of the signaled in the video data. 根據請求項17之設備,其中為了決定該第一類別索引,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為: 決定用於該重建取樣的一活動值; 決定用於該重建取樣的一方向;及 基於該活動值和該方向,來決定該第一類別索引。 The apparatus of claim 17, wherein to determine the first class index, the one or more processors are also configured to: determining an activity value for the reconstructed sampling; determine a direction to use for the reconstruction sampling; and Based on the activity value and the direction, the first category index is determined. 根據請求項20之設備,其中為了決定該方向,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為將56個值之一分配給該方向。The apparatus of claim 20, wherein in order to determine the direction, the one or more processors are also configured to assign one of 56 values to the direction. 根據請求項17之設備,其中該第一組濾波器包括一9x9菱形濾波器。The apparatus of claim 17, wherein the first set of filters includes a 9x9 diamond filter. 根據請求項17之設備,其中為了基於該重建取樣、該第一取樣修改值和該第二取樣修改值來決定該經濾波的重建取樣,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:將該第一取樣修改值和該第二取樣修改值添加到該重建取樣。The apparatus of claim 17, wherein in order to determine the filtered reconstructed samples based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value, the one or more processors are also configured to: The first sample modification value and the second sample modification value are added to the reconstructed sample. 根據請求項17之設備,其中為了基於該第一中間取樣值來決定該第二取樣修改值,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:修剪第二取樣修改值以決定一經修剪的取樣修改值,以及將該第一取樣修改值和該經修剪的取樣修改值添加到該重建取樣。The apparatus of claim 17, wherein to determine the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value, the one or more processors are also configured to: trim the second sample modification value to determine a trimmed sample modification value value, and add the first sample modification value and the trimmed sample modification value to the reconstructed sample. 根據請求項24之設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為: 在該視訊資料中接收該經修剪的取樣修改值。 The apparatus of claim 24, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: The trimmed sample modification value is received in the video data. 根據請求項17之設備,其中為了基於該第一中間取樣值來決定該第二取樣修改值,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為決定該重建取樣與該第一中間取樣值之間的一差。The apparatus of claim 17, wherein in order to determine the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value, the one or more processors are also configured to determine a difference between the reconstructed sample and the first intermediate sample value One bad. 根據請求項17之設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為: 基於用於該重建塊的一量化參數,來從複數組固定濾波器中選擇該第一組濾波器。 The apparatus of claim 17, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: The first set of filters is selected from the complex set of fixed filters based on a quantization parameter for the reconstructed block. 根據請求項17之設備,其中 為了應用該第一階段ALF,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:決定用於該重建取樣的一第三類別索引,基於該第三類別索引來從一第二組濾波器中選擇一第三濾波器,以及向該重建取樣應用來自該第二組濾波器的該第三濾波器,以決定一第二中間取樣值; 為了向該重建取樣應用該第二階段ALF,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為:基於該第一中間取樣值和該第二中間取樣值來決定該第二取樣修改值。 Apparatus according to claim 17, wherein To apply the first-stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determine a third class index for the reconstructed sample, select a filter from a second set of filters based on the third class index a third filter, and applying the third filter from the second set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine a second intermediate sample value; To apply the second stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, the one or more processors are also configured to determine the second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value and the second intermediate sample value. 根據請求項17之設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為: 將一預測取樣值與一殘差取樣值相加,以決定該重建取樣。 The apparatus of claim 17, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: A prediction sample is added to a residual sample to determine the reconstructed sample. 根據請求項29之設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為: 向該預測取樣值和該殘差取樣值之一和應用一去塊濾波器,以決定該重建取樣。 The apparatus of claim 29, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: A deblocking filter is applied to one of the predicted samples and the residual samples to determine the reconstructed samples. 根據請求項17之設備,其中該一或多個處理器亦被配置為: 輸出該視訊資料的一解碼圖片,其中該解碼圖片包括經濾波的重建取樣。 The apparatus of claim 17, wherein the one or more processors are also configured to: A decoded picture of the video data is output, wherein the decoded picture includes filtered reconstructed samples. 根據請求項17之設備,其中該設備包括一視訊編碼設備。The apparatus of claim 17, wherein the apparatus comprises a video encoding apparatus. 根據請求項32之設備,其中該設備包括一無線通訊設備,亦包括以下步驟:被配置為接收經編碼的視訊資料的一接收器。The apparatus of claim 32, wherein the apparatus comprises a wireless communication device, further comprising the step of: a receiver configured to receive the encoded video data. 根據請求項33之設備,其中該無線通訊設備包括一電話手機,並且其中該接收器被配置為根據一無線通訊標準來解調包括該經編碼的視訊資料的一訊號。The apparatus of claim 33, wherein the wireless communication device comprises a telephone handset, and wherein the receiver is configured to demodulate a signal comprising the encoded video data according to a wireless communication standard. 根據請求項17之設備,亦包括: 一顯示器,其被配置為顯示經解碼的視訊資料。 Equipment according to claim 17, also including: A display configured to display the decoded video data. 根據請求項17之設備,其中該設備包括以下各項中的一項或多項:一相機、一電腦、一行動設備、一廣播接收器設備或一機上盒。An apparatus according to claim 17, wherein the apparatus comprises one or more of the following: a camera, a computer, a mobile device, a broadcast receiver device or a set-top box. 根據請求項17之設備,其中該設備包括一視訊編碼設備。The apparatus of claim 17, wherein the apparatus comprises a video encoding apparatus. 一種儲存指令的電腦可讀取儲存媒體,該等指令當由一或多個處理器執行時使該一或多個處理器用於: 向一重建塊的一重建取樣應用一第一階段自我調整迴路濾波器(ALF),其中為了應用該第一階段ALF,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為: 決定用於該重建取樣的一第一類別索引; 基於該第一類別索引,從一第一組濾波器中選擇一濾波器;及 向該重建取樣應用來自該第一組濾波器的該濾波器,以決定一第一中間取樣值; 向該重建取樣應用一第二階段ALF,其中為了應用該第二階段ALF,該一或多個處理器亦被配置為: 決定用於該重建取樣的一第二類別索引; 基於該第二類別索引,從一第二組濾波器中選擇一第二濾波器; 向該重建取樣應用該第二濾波器,以決定一第一取樣修改值; 基於該第一中間取樣值,來決定一第二取樣修改值;及 基於該重建取樣、該第一取樣修改值和該第二取樣修改值,來決定一經濾波的重建取樣。 A computer-readable storage medium storing instructions that, when executed by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to: Applying a first-stage self-adjusting loop filter (ALF) to a reconstructed sample of a reconstruction block, wherein to apply the first-stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determining a first class index for the reconstructed sample; selecting a filter from a first set of filters based on the first class index; and applying the filter from the first set of filters to the reconstructed samples to determine a first intermediate sample value; Applying a second-stage ALF to the reconstructed samples, wherein to apply the second-stage ALF, the one or more processors are also configured to: determining a second class index for the reconstructed sample; selecting a second filter from a second set of filters based on the second class index; applying the second filter to the reconstructed samples to determine a first sample modification value; determining a second sample modification value based on the first intermediate sample value; and Based on the reconstructed samples, the first sample modification value, and the second sample modification value, a filtered reconstructed sample is determined.
TW110148425A 2020-12-23 2021-12-23 Adaptive loop filter with fixed filters TW202234886A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202063130275P 2020-12-23 2020-12-23
US63/130,275 2020-12-23
US202163148538P 2021-02-11 2021-02-11
US63/148,538 2021-02-11
US17/557,706 US11778177B2 (en) 2020-12-23 2021-12-21 Adaptive loop filter with fixed filters
US17/557,706 2021-12-21

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202234886A true TW202234886A (en) 2022-09-01

Family

ID=80001446

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW110148425A TW202234886A (en) 2020-12-23 2021-12-23 Adaptive loop filter with fixed filters

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP4268458A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2024501465A (en)
KR (1) KR20230123947A (en)
TW (1) TW202234886A (en)
WO (1) WO2022140567A1 (en)

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11563938B2 (en) 2016-02-15 2023-01-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Geometric transforms for filters for video coding
US11889070B2 (en) * 2018-03-23 2024-01-30 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Image filtering apparatus, image decoding apparatus, and image coding apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2024501465A (en) 2024-01-12
WO2022140567A1 (en) 2022-06-30
EP4268458A1 (en) 2023-11-01
KR20230123947A (en) 2023-08-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN113853784B (en) Methods and apparatus for multiple sets of adaptive loop filters for video coding
TW202115977A (en) Cross-component adaptive loop filtering for video coding
TW202118297A (en) Scaling matrices and signaling for video coding
US11778177B2 (en) Adaptive loop filter with fixed filters
TW202123705A (en) Low-frequency non-separable transform (lfnst) signaling
US20220030232A1 (en) Multiple adaptive loop filter sets
TW202044833A (en) Video coding in triangular prediction unit mode using different chroma formats
TW202034695A (en) Constrained affine motion inheritance for video coding
US11778213B2 (en) Activation function design in neural network-based filtering process for video coding
TW202127884A (en) Bit shifting for cross-component adaptive loop filtering for video coding
TW202029753A (en) Wide-angle intra prediction for video coding
TW202106010A (en) Dc intra mode prediction in video coding
TW202234886A (en) Adaptive loop filter with fixed filters
US20230300328A1 (en) Adaptive loop filter with samples before deblocking filter and samples before sample adaptive offsets
US20240015337A1 (en) Filtering in parallel with deblocking filtering in video coding
TW202308377A (en) Signaled adaptive loop filter with multiple classifiers in video coding
TW202215846A (en) Constraining operational bit depth of adaptive loop filtering for coding of video data at different bit depth
CN116636207A (en) Adaptive loop filter with fixed filter
CN117561712A (en) Signaling adaptive loop filter with multiple classifiers in video coding
WO2024011113A1 (en) Filtering in parallel with deblocking filtering in video coding
TW202234887A (en) Sign prediction for multiple color components in video coding
TW202408239A (en) Intra-prediction fusion for video coding
EP4222963A1 (en) Fixed bit depth processing for cross-component linear model (cclm) mode in video coding